1654 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1657

the brightness of image by gathering more light from distant object. (b) The reflected ray rotates through an angle  13. A ray of light is incidenting normally on a plane mirror. The angle of 23. A small object is placed 10 cm infront of a plane mirror. If you stand
However, it increases aberrations particularly spherical. reflection will be [MP PET 2000] behind the object 30 cm from the mirror and look at its image, the
(c) The reflected ray rotates through an angle 2
 For a telescope with increase in length of the tube, magnification distance focused for your eye will be
decreases. (d) The incident ray is fixed (a) 0 (b) 90 [KCET (Engg.) 2001]
 In case of a telescope if object and final image are at infinity then : 5. A plane mirror is approaching you at a speed of 10 cm / sec You (c) Will not be reflected (d) None of the above (a) 60 cm (b) 20 cm
f D can see your image in it. At what speed will your image approach 14. When light wave suffers reflection at the interface from air to glass,
m o  (c) 40 cm (d) 80 cm
fe d you [CPMT 1974] the change in phase of the reflected wave is equal to 24. An object is at a distance of 0.5 m in front of a plane mirror.
D d
(a) 10cm / sec (b) 5 cm / sec [CPMT 1991; J & KCET 2004] Distance between the object and image is [CPMT 2002]

 (a) 0.5 m (b) 1 m

(c) 20cm / sec (d) 15cm / sec (a) 0 (b)
fo fe 2 (c) 0.25 m (d) 1.5 m
6. A light bulb is placed between two plane mirrors inclined at an 25. A man runs towards a mirror at a speed 15 m/s The speed of the
 If we are given four convex lenses having focal lengths angle of 60. The number of images formed are [N (c)  (d) 2 image relative to the man is [Kerala PET 2002]
f1  f2  f3  f4 . For making a good telescope and microscope. We
SCRA 1994; AIIMS 1997; RPMT 1999; AIEEE 2002; 15. A ray is reflected in turn by three plain mirrors mutually at right
choose the following lenses respectively. (a) 15 ms 1 (b) 30 ms 1
Orissa JEE 2003; MP PMT 2004; MP PET 2004] angles to each other. The angle between the incident and the
Telescope f1 (o), f4 (e ) Microscope f4 (o), f3 (e ) (c) 35 ms 1 (d) 20 ms 1
(a) 6 (b) 2 reflected rays is [Roorkee 1995]
 If a parrot is sitting on the objective of a large telescope and we 26. The light reflected by a plane mirror may form a real image
(c) 5 (d) 4 (a) 90 (b) 60
look towards (or take a photograph)of distant astronomical object (say [KCET (Engg. & Med.) 2002]
moon) through it, the parrot will not be seen but the intensity of the 7. It is desired to photograph the image of an object placed at a (c) 180 (d) None of these (a) If the rays incident on the mirror are diverging
image will be slightly reduced as the parrot will act as obstruction to distance of 3m from the plane mirror. The camera which is at a 16. Two plane mirrors are at right angles to each other. A man stands
light and will reduce the aperture of the objective. (b) If the rays incident on the mirror are converging
distance of 4.5m from the mirror should be focussed for a between them and combs his hair with his right hand. In how many
 The luminous flux of a source of (1/685) watt emitting distance of [NCERT 1971] of the images will he be seen using his right hand [MP PMT 1995; UPSEAT 2001] (c) If the object is placed very close to the mirror
monochromatic light of wavelength 5500 Å is called 1 lumen. (a) None (b) 1 (d) Under no circumstances
(a) 3m (b) 4.5m
 While solving the problems of photometry keep in mind. (c) 2 (d) 3 27. Two plane mirrors are inclined at an angle of 72 0 . The number of
(c) 6m (d) 7.5m
RL (As  = R = 4L) 17. When a plane mirror is rotated through an angle  then the images of a point object placed between them will be [KCET (Engg. & Med.)1999; B
8. A thick plane mirror shows a number of images of the filament of
R 1 1 L reflected ray turns through the angle 2 then the size of the image (a) 2 (b) 3
   1 an electric bulb. Of these, the brightest image is the
R2 2 L2 (a) Is doubled (b) Is halved
(a) First (b) Second (c) 4 (d) 5
(c) Remains the same (d) Becomes infinite
(c) Fourth (d) Last 28. To get three images of a single object, one should have two plane
18. A plane mirror produces a magnification of mirrors at an angle of [AIEEE 2003]
9. A man is 180cm tall and his eyes are 10cm below the top of his [MP PET/PMT 1997]
head. In order to see his entire height right from toe to head, he (a) 30° (b) 60°
uses a plane mirror kept at a distance of 1m from him. The (a) 1 (b) 1 (c) 90° (d) 150°
minimum length of the plane mirror required is (c) Zero (d) Between 0 and   29. A man of length h requires a mirror, to see his own complete image
[MP PMT 1993; DPMT 2001] of length at least equal to [MP PET 2003]
Plane Mirror 19. A plane mirror makes an angle of 30 with horizontal. If a vertical
(a) 180cm (b) 90cm ray strikes the mirror, find the angle between mirror and reflected h h
1. Two vertical plane mirrors are inclined at an angle of 60 with ray [RPET 1997] (a) (b)
4 3
each other. A ray of light travelling horizontally is reflected first (c) 85cm (d) 170cm (a) 30 (b) 45
from one mirror and then from the other. The resultant deviation is h
10. A person is in a room whose ceiling and two adjacent walls are (c) 60 (d) 90 (c) (d) h
(a) 60 (b) 120 mirrors. How many images are formed [AFMC 2002] 2
(c) 180 (d) 240 20. A watch shows time as 3 : 25 when seen through a mirror, time
(a) 5 (b) 6 30. Two plane mirrors are at 45 to each other. If an object is placed
appeared will be [RPMT 1997; JIPMER 2001, 02]
2. A plane mirror reflects a pencil of light to form a real image. Then between them, then the number of images will be
the pencil of light incident on the mirror is (c) 7 (d) 8 (a) 8 : 35 (b) 9 : 35 [MP PMT 2003]
[MP PMT 1997; DCE 2001, 03] 11. When a plane mirror is placed horizontally on a level ground at a (c) 7 : 35 (d) 8 : 25 (a) 5 (b) 9
(a) Parallel (b) Convergent distance of 60m from the foot of a tower, the top of the tower and
21. If an observer is walking away from the plane mirror with (c) 7 (d) 8
(c) Divergent (d) None of the above its image in the mirror subtend an angle of 90 at the eye. The
height of the tower will be [CPMT 1984] 6m / sec. Then the velocity of the image with respect to observer 31. A man having height 6 m. He observes image of 2 m height erect,
3. What should be the angle between two plane mirrors so that
will be [RPMT 1999] then mirror used is [BCECE 2004]
whatever be the angle of incidence, the incident ray and the (a) 30m (b) 60m
reflected ray from the two mirrors be parallel to each other (a) 6m / sec (b)  6m / sec (a) Concave (b) Convex
[KCET 1994; SCRA 1994] (c) 90m (d) 120m (c) Plane (d) None of these
(c) 12m / sec (d) 3m / sec
(a) 60 (b) 90 12. A ray of light incidents on a plane mirror at an angle of 30. The 32. A light beam is being reflected by using two mirrors, as in a
(c) 120 (d) 175 deviation produced in the ray is 22. A man runs towards mirror at a speed of 15 m / s. What is the periscope used in submarines. If one of the mirrors rotates by an
4. A plane mirror reflecting a ray of incident light is rotated through speed of his image [CBSE PMT 2000] angle , the reflected light will deviate from its original path by the
(a) 30 (b) 60
an angle  about an axis through the point of incidence in the (a) 7.5 m/s (b) 15 m/s angle [UPSEAT 2004]

plane of the mirror perpendicular to the plane of incidence, then [NCERT 90CPMT 1991]
(c) 1978; (d) 120 (c) 30 m/s (d) 45 m/s (a) 2 (b) 0 o
(a) The reflected ray does not rotate
 1658 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1659

(c)  (d) 4 fx f (d) The virtual image formed in a plane mirror can be 25. If an object is placed 10cm infront of a concave mirror of focal
(a) (b) photographed
33. Focal length of a plane mirror is [RPMT 2000] f x length 20cm, the image will be [MP PMT 1995]
17. The relation between the linear magnification m , the object
(a) Zero (b) Infinite (a) Diminished, upright, virtual
f f2 distance u and the focal length f is
(c) Very less (d) Indefinite (c) (d)
x x 2 (b) Enlarged, upright, virtual
34. A ray of light is incident at 50° on the middle of one of the two f u f
9. Image formed by a convex mirror is [MP PET 1993] (a) m (b) m  (c) Diminished, inverted, real
mirrors arranged at an angle of 60° between them. The ray then f f u
touches the second mirror, get reflected back to the first mirror, (a) Virtual (b) Real (d) Enlarged, upright, real
f u f
making an angle of incidence of [MP PET 2005] (c) Enlarged (d) Inverted (c) m (d) m  26. Which of the following form(s) a virtual and erect image for all
f f u
(a) 50° (b) 60° 10. In a concave mirror experiment, an object is placed at a distance x 1 positions of the object [IIT-JEE 1996]
18. While using an electric bulb, the reflection for street lighting should
(c) 70° (d) 80° from the focus and the image is formed at a distance x 2 from the be from (a) Convex lens (b) Concave lens
Spherical Mirror focus. The focal length of the mirror would be (a) Concave mirror (b) Convex mirror (c) Convex mirror (d) Concave mirror
1 (c) Cylindrical mirror (d) Parabolic mirror
1. A convex mirror of focal length f forms an image which is times (a) x1 x 2 (b) x1 x 2 27. A convex mirror has a focal length f . A real object is placed at a
n 19. A concave mirror is used to focus the image of a flower on a nearby
well 120cm from the flower. If a lateral magnification of 16 is distance f in front of it from the pole produces an image at
the object. The distance of the object from the mirror is x1  x 2 x1
(c) (d) desired, the distance of the flower from the mirror should be [MP PET 1986]
 n 1  2 x2 (a) Infinity (b) f
(a) (n  1) f (b)  f (a) 8 cm (b) 12cm
 n  11. A convex mirror is used to form the image of an object. Then which (c) f /2 (d) 2 f
(c) 80cm (d) 120cm
of the following statements is wrong
 n 1 20. A virtual image larger than the object can be obtained by 28. An object 1cm tall is placed 4 cm infront of a mirror. In order to
(c)  f (d) (n  1) f [CPMT 1973]
 n  [MP PMT 1986] produce an upright image of 3cm height one needs a
(a) The image lies between the pole and the focus
2. A diminished virtual image can be formed only in (a) Concave mirror (b) Convex mirror
(b) The image is diminished in size (a) Convex mirror of radius of curvature 12cm
[MP PMT 2002] (c) Plane mirror (d) Concave lens
(c) The image is erect (b) Concave mirror of radius of curvature 12cm
(a) Plane mirror (b) A concave mirror 21. An object is placed 40cm from a concave mirror of focal length
(d) The image is real 20cm. The image formed is (c) Concave mirror of radius of curvature 4 cm
(c) A convex mirror (d) Concave-parabolic mirror
12. Given a point source of light, which of the following can produce a [MP PET 1986; MP PMT/PET 1998]
3. Which of the following could not produce a virtual image (d) Plane mirror of height 12cm
parallel beam of light [CPMT 1974; KCET 2005] (a) Real, inverted and same in size
(a) Plane mirror 29. Match List I with List II and select the correct answer using the
(a) Convex mirror (b) Real, inverted and smaller
(b) Convex mirror codes given below the lists : [SCRA 1998]
(b) Concave mirror (c) Virtual, erect and larger
(c) Concave mirror List I List II
(c) Concave lens (d) Virtual, erect and smaller
(d) All the above can produce a virtual image (Position of the object) (Magnification)
(d) Two plane mirrors inclined at an angle of 90 22. A virtual image three times the size of the object is obtained with a
4. An object 5 cm tall is placed 1m from a concave spherical mirror (I) An object is placed at focus (A) Magnification is  
13. The image formed by a convex mirror of focal length 30cm is a concave mirror of radius of curvature 36cm. The distance of the
which has a radius of curvature of 20cm The size of the image is [MP PET 1993] before a convex mirror
quarter of the size of the object. The distance of the object from the object from the mirror is [MP PET 1986]
(II) An object is placed at (B) Magnification is 0 .5
(a) 0.11cm (b) 0.50cm mirror is (a) 5 cm (b) 12cm centre of curvature before a
(c) 0.55cm (d) 0.60cm (a) 30cm (b) 90cm concave mirror
(c) 10cm (d) 20cm
5. The focal length of a concave mirror is 50cm. Where an object be
(III) An object is placed at (C) Magnification is 1
(c) 120cm (d) 60cm focus before a concave mirror
23. Radius of curvature of concave mirror is 40cm and the size of
placed so that its image is two times and inverted
14. A boy stands straight infront of a mirror at a distance of 30cm image is twice as that of object, then the object distance is (IV) An object is placed at (D) Magnification is – 1
(a) 75 cm (b) 72 cm centre of curvature before a
1 [AFMC 1995]
(c) 63 cm (d) 50 cm away from it. He sees his erect image whose height is th of his convex mirror
5
(a) 60cm (b) 20cm (E) Magnification is 0.33
6. An object of size 7.5 cm is placed in front of a convex mirror of real height. The mirror he is using is
radius of curvature 25cm at a distance of 40cm. The size of the [MP PMT 1993] (c) 40cm (d) 30cm Codes :
image should be (a) Plane mirror (b) Convex mirror (a) I-B, II-D, III-A, IV-E (b) I-A, II-D, III-C, IV-B
24. All of the following statements are correct except
(a) 2.3cm (b) 1.78 cm (c) Concave mirror (d) Plano-convex mirror (c) I-C, II-B, III-A, IV-E (d) I-B, II-E, III-D, IV-C
[Manipal MEE 1995]
15. A person sees his virtual image by holding a mirror very close to the
(c) 1cm (d) 0.8 cm 30. A concave mirror gives an image three times as large as the object
face. When he moves the mirror away from his face, the image (a) The magnification produced by a convex mirror is always less
7. The field of view is maximum for becomes inverted. What type of mirror he is using than one placed at a distance of 20cm from it. For the image to be real, the
focal length should be
(a) Plane mirror (b) Concave mirror (a) Plane mirror (b) Convex mirror (b) A virtual, erect, same-sized image can be obtained using a
(c) Concave mirror (d) None of these plane mirror [SCRA 1998; JIPMER 2000]
(c) Convex mirror (d) Cylindrical mirror
8. The focal length of a concave mirror is f and the distance from the 16. Which one of the following statements is true (c) A virtual, erect, magnified image can be formed using a (a) 10cm (b) 15cm
object to the principle focus is x. The ratio of the size of the image (a) An object situated at the principle focus of a concave lens will concave mirror
(c) 20cm (d) 30cm
to the size of the object is have its image formed at infinity (d) A real, inverted, same-sized image can be formed using a
[Kerala PET 2005] (b) Concave mirror can give diminished virtual image convex mirror 31. The minimum distance between the object and its real image for
concave mirror is [RPMT 1999]
(c) Given a point source of light, a convex mirror can produce a
parallel beam of light (a) f (b) 2f
 1660 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1661

(c) 4f (d) Zero (c) 4 cm (d) 1.2 cm (d) Wavelength and velocity 14. A rectangular tank of depth 8 meter is full of water (   4 / 3 ),
32. An object is placed at 20cm from a convex mirror of focal length 41. Convergence of concave mirror can be decreased by dipping in 6. A light wave has a frequency of 4  1014 Hz and a wavelength of the bottom is seen at the depth [MP PMT 1987]
10 cm. The image formed by the mirror is (a) Water (b) Oil (a) 6 m (b) 8/3 m
5  10 7 meters in a medium. The refractive index of the medium
[JIPMER 1999] (c) Both (d) None of these is [MP PMT 1989] (c) 8 cm (d) 10 cm
42. What will be the height of image when an object of 2 mm is placed 15. A vessel of depth 2d cm is half filled with a liquid of refractive index
(a) Real and at 20 cm from the mirror (a) 1.5 (b) 1.33
on the axis of a convex mirror at a distance 20 cm of radius of 1 and the upper half with a liquid of refractive index  2 . The
curvature 40 cm [Orissa PMT 2004] (c) 1.0 (d) 0.66
(b) Virtual and at 20 cm from the mirror apparent depth of the vessel seen perpendicularly is
(a) 20 mm (b) 10 mm 7. How much water should be filled in a container 21 cm in height, so
(c) Virtual and at 20 / 3 cm from the mirror that it appears half filled when viewed from the top of the container     1 1 
(c) 6 mm (d) 1 mm (a) d  1 2 
 (b) d   

(given that a   4 / 3 )  1   2   1  2 
(d) Real and at 20 / 3 cm from the mirror 43. Image formed by a concave mirror of focal length 6 cm, is 3 times
of the object, then the distance of object from mirror is [MP PMT 1989]  1 1   1 
33. A point object is placed at a distance of 10 cm and its real image is (c) 2d   
 (d) 2d  

[RPMT 2000] (a) 8.0 cm (b) 10.5 cm  1  2   1  2 
formed at a distance of 20 cm from a concave mirror. If the object (a) – 4 cm (b) 8 cm (c) 12.0 cm (d) None of the above 16. A beam of light is converging towards a point I on a screen. A
is moved by 0.1 cm towards the mirror, the image will shift by (c) 6 cm (d) 12 cm 8. Light of different colours propagates through air plane glass plate whose thickness in the direction of the beam = t ,
about [MP PMT 2000] 44. A concave mirror of focal length f (in air) is immersed in water refractive index =  , is introduced in the path of the beam. The
(a) With the velocity of air
(   4 / 3 ). The focal length of the mirror in water will be convergence point is shifted by
(a) 0.4 cm away from the mirror (b) With different velocities [MNR 1987]
4
(a) f (b) f  1  1
(b) 0.4 cm towards the mirror 3 (c) With the velocity of sound (a) t  1   away (b) t  1   away
   
(c) 0.8 cm away from the mirror 3 7 (d) Having the equal velocities
(c) f (d) f
4 3  1  1
(d) 0.8 cm towards the mirror 9. Monochromatic light is refracted from air into the glass of refractive (c) t  1   nearer (d) t  1   nearer
index  . The ratio of the wavelength of incident and refracted    
34. Under which of the following conditions will a convex mirror of
focal length f produce an image that is erect, diminished and virtual
Refraction of Light at Plane Surfaces
[AMU (Engg.) 2001] waves is 17. Light travels through a glass plate of thickness t and having
refractive index n. If c is the velocity of light in vacuum, the time
(a) Only when 2f > u > f (b) Only when u = f 1. To an observer on the earth the stars appear to twinkle. This can be [JIPMER 2000; MP PMT 1996, 2003] taken by the light to travel this thickness of glass is
(c) Only when u < f (d) Always ascribed to [NCERT 1976; MP PET 1994; CBSE PMT 1996;
(a) 1 :  (b) 1 :  2
35. The focal length of a convex mirror is 20 cm its radius of curvature [CPMT 1972, 74; AFMC 1995] KCET 1994; MP PMT 1999, 2001]
will be [MP PMT 2001]
(a) The fact that stars do not emit light continuously
(c)  :1 (d) 1 : 1 t
(a) (b) tnc
(a) 10 cm (b) 20 cm (b) Frequent absorption of star light by their own atmosphere 10. A monochromatic beam of light passes from a denser medium into a nc
(c) 30 cm (d) 40 cm rarer medium. As a result [CPMT 1972]
(c) Frequent absorption of star light by the earth's atmosphere nt tc
(a) Its velocity increases (b) Its velocity decreases (c) (d)
36. A concave mirror of focal length 15 cm forms an image having twice c n
(d) The refractive index fluctuations in the earth's atmosphere
the linear dimensions of the object. The position of the object when (c) Its frequency decreases (d) Its wavelength decreases 18. When a light wave goes from air into water, the quality that
the image is virtual will be 2. The ratio of the refractive index of red light to blue light in air is
11. Refractive index for a material for infrared light is remains unchanged is its
(a) 22.5 cm (b) 7.5 cm (a) Less than unity [AMU 1995; MNR 1985, 95; KCET 1993; CPMT 1990, 97; MP PET 1991, 2000,
[CPMT 1984] 02; UPSEAT 1999, 2000;
(c) 30 cm (d) 45 cm (b) Equal to unity
(a) Equal to that of ultraviolet light AFMC 1993, 98, 2003; RPET 1996, 2000, 03;
37. A point object is placed at a distance of 30 cm from a convex mirror (c) Greater than unity
RPMT 1999, 2000; DCE 2001; BHU 2001]
of focal length 30cm. The image will form at (d) Less as well as greater than unity depending upon the (b) Less than for ultraviolet light
(a) Speed (b) Amplitude
[JIPMER 2002] experimental arrangement (c) Equal to that for red colour of light
(c) Frequency (d) Wavelength
(a) Infinity 3. The refractive index of a piece of transparent quartz is the greatest (d) Greater than that for ultraviolet light
for [MP PET 1985, 94]
19. Light takes 8 min 20 sec to reach from sun on the earth. If the
(b) Focus 12. The index of refraction of diamond is 2.0, velocity of light in whole atmosphere is filled with water, the light will take the time
(a) Red light (b) Violet light
(c) Pole diamond in cm/second is approximately ( a w  4 / 3 )
(d) 15 cm behind the mirror (c) Green light (d) Yellow light [CPMT 1975; MNR 1987; UPSEAT 2000] (a) 8 min 20 sec (b) 8 min
38. An object 2.5 cm high is placed at a distance of 10 cm from a 4. The refractive index of a certain glass is 1.5 for light whose (c) 6 min 11 sec (d) 11 min 6 sec
concave mirror of radius of curvature 30 cm The size of the image wavelength in vacuum is 6000 Å. The wavelength of this light when (a) 6  1010 (b) 3.0  1010
is [BVP 2003] it passes through glass is 20. The length of the optical path of two media in contact of length d1
(c) 2  1010 (d) 1.5  1010
(a) 9.2 cm (b) 10.5 cm [NCERT 1979; CBSE PMT 1993; and d 2 of refractive indices 1 and  2 respectively, is
13. A beam of light propagating in medium A with index of refraction n
(c) 5.6 cm (d) 7.5 cm MP PET 1985, 89]
(A) passes across an interface into medium B with index of (a) 1d1  2d 2 (b) 1d 2  2d1
39. For a real object, which of the following can produced a real image (a) 4000[Orissa
Å JEE 2003] (b) 6000 Å refraction n(B). The angle of incidence is greater than the angle of d1 d 2 d1  d 2
(a) Plane mirror (b) Concave lens (c) 9000 Å (d) 15000 Å refraction; v(A) and v(B) denotes the speed of light in A and B. Then (c) (d)
1  2 1  2
(c) Convex mirror (d) Concave mirror 5. When light travels from one medium to the other of which the which of the following is true
refractive index is different, then which of the following will change 21. Immiscible transparent liquids A, B, C, D and E are placed in a
40. An object of length 6 cm is placed on the principle axis of a (a) v(A) > v(B) and n(A) > n(B) rectangular container of glass with the liquids making layers
concave mirror of focal length f at a distance of 4f. The length of [MP PMT 1986; AMU 2001; BVP 2003]
(b) v(A) > v(B) and n(A) < n(B) according to their densities. The refractive index of the liquids are
the image will be [MP PET 2003] (a) Frequency, wavelength and velocity shown in the adjoining diagram. The container is illuminated from
(a) 2 cm (b) 12 cm (b) Frequency and wavelength (c) v(A) < v(B) and n(A) > n(B) the side and a small piece of glass having refractive index 1.61 is
(c) Frequency and velocity (d) v(A) < v(B) and n(A) < n(B)
 1662 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1663

gently dropped into the liquid layer. The glass piece as it descends (b) Will be reflected back into the glass (a) Frequency increases and speed decreases 42. The distance travelled by light in glass (refractive index =1.5) in a
downwards will not be visible in [CPMT 1986] nanosecond will be [MP PET 1999]
(c) Will be absorbed (b) Frequency is same but the wavelength is smaller in water than
(a) Liquid A and B only A 1.51 in air (a) 45 cm (b) 40 cm
B 1.53 (d) Will emerge into the air with an angle of refraction equal to (c) 30 cm (d) 20 cm
(b) Liquid C only (c) Frequency is same but the wavelength in water is greater than
90° 43. When light is refracted from air into glass
C 1.61 in air
(c) Liquid D and E only
D 1.52 29. If  0 and  0 are respectively, the electric permittivity and the (d) Frequency decreases and wavelength is smaller in water than in [IIT 1980; CBSE PMT 1992; MP PET 1999;
(d) Liquid A, B, D and E air MP PMT 1999; RPMT 1997, 2000, 03; MH CET 2004]
E 1.65 magnetic permeability of free space,  and  the corresponding (a) Its wavelength and frequency both increase
22. The refractive indices of glass and water w.r.t. air are 3/2 and 4/3 35. On a glass plate a light wave is incident at an angle of 60°. If the
quantities in a medium, the refractive index of the medium is (b) Its wavelength increases but frequency remains unchanged
respectively. The refractive index of glass w.r.t. water will be reflected and the refracted waves are mutually perpendicular, the
[IIT-JEE 1982; MP PET 1995; CBSE PMT 1997] (c) Its wavelength decreases but frequency remains unchanged
[MNR 1990; JIPMER 1997, 2000; MP PET 2000] refractive index of material is
(d) Its wavelength and frequency both decrease
(a) 8/9 (b) 9/8 [MP PMT 1994; Haryana CEE 1996;
  44. A mark at the bottom of a liquid appears to rise by 0.1 m. The depth
(a) (b) KCET 1994; 2000]
(c) 7/6 (d) None of these 0 0 0 0 of the liquid is 1 m. The refractive index of the liquid is
ij
23. If represents refractive index when a light ray goes from 3 9
(a) (b) 3
0 0 0 2 (a) 1.33 (b)
medium i to medium j, then the product 2 1  3 2  4 3 is equal (c) (d) 10
  0
to [CBSE PMT 1990] 3 1 10
(c) (d) (c) (b) 1.5
30. A beam of monochromatic blue light of wavelength 4200Å in air 2
3 1 3 2
(a) (b) 3 9
travels in water (   4 / 3 ). Its wavelength in water will be [M
3 4 45. A man standing in a swimming pool looks at a stone lying at the
1 36. Refractive index of glass is and refractive index of water is . If
(c) (d) 4 2 (a) 2800 Å (b) 5600 Å 2 3 bottom. The depth of the swimming pool is h. At what distance
1 4 from the surface of water is the image of the stone formed (Line of
(c) 3150 Å (d) 4000 Å the speed of light in glass is 2.00  10 8 m/s, the speed in water
24. The wavelength of light diminishes  times (   1.33 for water) will be [MP PMT 1994; RPMT 1997] vision is normal; Refractive index of water is n)
31. If  0 be the relative permeability and K 0 the dielectric constant
in a medium. A diver from inside water looks at an object whose (a) h / n (b) n / h
natural colour is green. He sees the object as of a medium, its refractive index is given by (a) 2.67  10 8 m/s (b) 2.25  10 8 m/s
(c) h (d) hn
[CPMT 1990; MNR 1998] [MNR 1995] (c) 1.78  10 8 m/s (d) 1.50  10 8 m/s 46. On heating a liquid, the refractive index generally
(a) Green (b) Blue 1 1
(a) (b) 37. Monochromatic light of frequency 5  1014 Hz travelling in vacuum [KCET 1994]
(c) Yellow (d) Red 0 K0 0 K0 enters a medium of refractive index 1.5. Its wavelength in the (a) Decreases
25. Ray optics fails when medium is
(b) Increases or decreases depending on the rate of heating
(c) 0 K 0 (d) 0 K0 [MP PET/ PMT 1995; Pb. PET 2003]
(a) The size of the obstacle is 5 cm (c) Does not change
(a) 4000 Å (b) 5000 Å
(b) The size of the obstacle is 3 cm 32. If the speed of light in vacuum is C m / sec, then the velocity of (d) Increases
light in a medium of refractive index 1.5 (c) 6000 Å (d) 5500 Å
(c) The size of the obstacle is less than the wavelength of light 47. If î denotes a unit vector along incident light ray, r̂ a unit vector
[NCERT 1977; MP PMT 1984; CPMT 2002] 38. Light of wavelength is 7200 Å in air. It has a wavelength in glass
(d) (a) and (b) both (   1.5 ) equal to [DCE 1999] along refracted ray into a medium of refractive index  and n̂
(a) Is 1.5  C (b) Is C unit vector normal to boundary of medium directed towards
26. When light travels from air to water and from water to glass, again (a) 7200 Å (b) 4800 Å
from glass to CO 2 gas and finally through air. The relation incident medium, then law of refraction is
C (c) 10800 Å (d) 7201.5 Å
(c) Is (d) Can have any velocity [EAMCET (Engg.) 1995]
between their refractive indices will be given by 1 .5 39. Which of the following is not a correct statement
(a) a nw  wngl  glngas  gasna  1 33. In the adjoining diagram, a wavefront AB, moving in air is incident [MP PET 1997] (a) ˆi . nˆ  (rˆ . nˆ ) (b) ˆi  nˆ  (nˆ  rˆ )
on a plane glass surface XY. Its position CD after refraction through (a) The wavelength of red light is greater than the wavelength of
(b) a nw  wngl  gasngl  glna  1 a glass slab is shown also along with the normals drawn at A and D. green light (c) ˆi  nˆ  (rˆ  nˆ ) (d) (ˆi  nˆ )  rˆ  nˆ
The refractive index of glass with respect to air (   1 ) will be (b) The wavelength of blue light is smaller than the wavelength of
48. The bottom of a container filled with liquid appear slightly raised
(c) a nw  wngl  glngas  1 orange light
equal to because of [RPMT 1997]
(c) The frequency of green light is greater than the frequency of
(d) There is no such relation [CPMT 1988; DPMT 1999] blue light (a) Refraction (b) Interference
27. For a colour of light the wavelength for air is 6000 Å and in water sin (d) The frequency of violet light is greater than the frequency of (c) Diffraction (d) Reflection
the wavelength is 4500 Å. Then the speed of light in water will be (a) blue light
sin ' 49. The speed of light in air is 3  10 8 m / s . What will be its speed in
B 40. Which of the following is a correct relation [MP PET 1997]
(a) 5.  1014 m / s (b) 2.25  10 8 m/s sin diamond whose refractive index is 2.4
(b) (a) a r  a w  r  (b) a r  r w  w  a
sin  ' 
[KCET 1993]
4.0  10 8 m/s  D
(c) (d) Zero X Y (c) a r  r a  0 (d) a r / w r  a w
A  
sin  ' (a) 3  10 8 m / s (b) 332 m / s
28. A ray of light travelling inside a rectangular glass block of refractive (c) 41. The time taken by sunlight to cross a 5 mm thick glass plate
sin C
(  3 / 2 ) is [MP PMT/PET 1998; BHU 2005] (c) 1.25  10 8 m/s (d) 7.2  10 8 m / s
index 2 is incident on the glass–air surface at an angle of
incidence of 45°. The refractive index of air is 1. Under these AB (a) 0.25  10 s (b) 0.167  10 7 s 50. Time taken by the sunlight to pass through a window of thickness 4
(d) –10

conditions the ray [CPMT 1972] CD mm whose refractive index is 1.5 is

(c) 2.5  10 10 s (d) 1.0  10 10 s [CBSE PMT 1993]
(a) Will emerge into the air without any deviation 34. When light enters from air to water, then its
[MP PMT 1994; MP PET 1996]
 1664 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1665

(a) 2  10 8 sec (b) 2  10 8 sec (a) 1.96  10 8 m/s (b) 2.12  10 8 m / s (a) Reflection of the light (b) Refraction of the light 74. An object is immersed in a fluid. In order that the object becomes
invisible, it should [AIIMS 2004]
(c) Scattering of the light (d) Dispersion of the light
(c) 2  10 11 sec (d) 2  1011 sec (c) 3.18  10 m / s
8
(d) 3.33  18 m / s8
(a) Behave as a perfect reflector
51. Ray optics is valid, when characteristic dimensions are 66. An under water swimmer is at a depth of 12 m below the surface of (b) Absorb all light falling on it
3 4 water. A bird is at a height of 18 m from the surface of water,
59. Absolute refractive indices of glass and water are and . The
[CBSE PMT 1994; CPMT 2001] 2 3 directly above his eyes. For the swimmer the bird appears to be at a (c) Have refractive index one
(a) Of the same order as the wavelength of light ratio of velocity of light in glass and water will be distance from the surface of water equal to (Refractive Index of (d) Have refractive index exactly matching with that of the
[UPSEAT 1999] water is 4/3) surrounding fluid
(b) Much smaller than the wavelength of light
(a) 4 : 3 (b) 8 : 7 [KCET (Engg.) 2001] 75. When light travels from glass to air, the incident angle is  1 and
(c) Of the order of one millimetre
(c) 8 : 9 (d) 3 : 4 (a) 24 m (b) 12 m the refracted angle is  2 . The true relation is
(d) Much larger than the wavelength of light
60. The ratio of thickness of plates of two transparent mediums A and B (c) 18 m (d) 9 m [Orissa PMT 2004]
52. The refractive index of water is 1.33. What will be the speed of light
is 6 : 4. If light takes equal time in passing through them, then (a)  1   2 (b)  1   2
in water [CBSE PMT 1996; KCET 1998] 67. The optical path of a monochromatic light is same if it goes through
refractive index of B with respect to A will be
4.0 cm of glass or 4.5 cm of water. If the refractive index of glass is
(a) 3  10 8 m / s (b) 2.25  10 8 m / s [UPSEAT 1999]
(c)  1   2 (d) Not predictable
1.53, the refractive index of the water is
(c) 4  10 8
m/s (d) 1.33  10 m/s 8 (a) 1.4 (b) 1.5 [UPSEAT 2002] 76. Velocity of light in a medium is 1.5  10 8 m / s. Its refractive index
(a) 1.30 (b) 1.36 will be [Pb. PET 2000]
53. The time required to pass the light through a glass slab of 2 mm (c) 1.75 (d) 1.33
(c) 1.42 (d) 1.46 (a) 8 (b) 6
thick is (  glass  1.5 ) [AFMC 1997; MH CET 2002, 04] 61. The refractive index of water and glass with respect to air is 1.3 and
(c) 4 (d) 2
1.5 respectively. Then the refractive index of glass with respect to 68. Which of the following statement is true [Orissa JEE 2002]
(a) 10 5 s (b) 10 11 s water is [MH CET (Med.) 1999] (a) Velocity of light is constant in all media 77. The frequency of a light ray is 6  10 14 Hz. Its frequency when it
propagates in a medium of refractive index 1.5, will be
2 .6 1 .5 (b) Velocity of light in vacuum is maximum
(c) 10 9 s (d) 10 13 s (a) (b) [MP PMT 2000; DPMT 2003; Pb PMT 2003; MH CET 2004]
1 .5 2 .6 (c) Velocity of light is same in all reference frames
54. The refractive index of water with respect to air is 4 / 3 and the (a) 1.67  10 14 Hz (b) 9.10  10 14 Hz
refractive index of glass with respect to air is 3/2. The refractive 1 .3 1 .5 (d) Laws of nature have identical form in all reference frames
(c) (d)
index of water with respect to glass is 1 .5 1 .3 69. A ray of light is incident on a transparent glass slab of refractive (c) 6  10 14 Hz (d) 4  10 14 Hz
[BHU 1997; JIPMER 2000]
index 1.62. The reflected and the refracted rays are mutually
62. A tank is filled with benzene to a height of 120 mm. The apparent 78. The refractive indices of water and glass with respect to air are 1.2
perpendicular. The angle of incidence is
9 8 depth of a needle lying at a bottom of the tank is measured by a and 1.5 respectively. The refractive index of glass with respect to
(a) (b) [MP PET 2002] water is [Pb. PET 2002]
microscope to be 80 mm. The refractive index of benzene is
8 9 (a) 58.3 o
(b) 50 o

(a) 1.5 (b) 2.5 (a) 0.6 (b) 0.8

1 (c) 35 o
(d) 30 o

(c) (d) 2 (c) 1.25 (d) 1.75

2 (c) 3.5 (d) 4.5 70. A microscope is focussed on a coin lying at the bottom of a beaker.
The microscope is now raised up by 1 cm. To what depth should the 79. The wavelength of sodium light in air is 5890 Å. The velocity of
55. Electromagnetic radiation of frequency n, wavelength  , travelling 63. Each quarter of a vessel of depth H is filled with liquids of the
refractive indices n , n , n and n from the bottom respectively. The water be poured into the beaker so that coin is again in focus ? light in air is 3  10 8 ms 1 . The wavelength of light in a glass of
with velocity v in air, enters a glass slab of refractive index  . The
refractive index 1.6 would be close to
1 2 3 4

apparent depth of the vessel when looked normally is 4

frequency, wavelength and velocity of light in the glass slab will be (Refractive index of water is )
respectively 3 [DCE 2003]
1 1 1 1 
[CBSE PMT 1997] H     

[BHU 2003] (a) 5890 Å (b) 3681 Å
H (n1  n2  n3  n4 )  n1 n2 n3 n4 
n  v  v (a) (b) 4 (c) 9424 Å (d) 15078 Å
(a) , , (b) n, , 4 4 (a) 1 cm (b) cm
     3
80. The mean distance of sun from the earth is 1.5  10 8 Km (nearly).
1 1 1 1  (c) 3 cm (d) 4 cm The time taken by the light to reach earth from the sun is
v n  H     

(c) n,, (d) , ,v (n1  n 2  n 3  n 4 )  n1 n2 n3 n4  71. Velocity of light in glass whose refractive index with respect to air is (a) 0.12 min (b) 8.33 min
   (c) (d)
4H 2 1.5 is 2  10 m/s and in certain liquid the velocity of light found to
8

(c) 12.5 min (d) 6.25 min

56. What is the time taken (in seconds) to cross a glass of thickness 4 be 2.5  10 m/s. The refractive index of the liquid with respect to air
8

81. Refractive index of air is 1.0003. The correct thickness of air column
mm and  = 3 by light [BHU 1998; 64. A ray of light passes through four transparent media with refractive is [CPMT 1978; MP PET/PMT 1988] which will have one more wavelength of yellow light (6000 Å) than
indices 1 . 2  3 , and  4 as shown in the figure. The surfaces of in the same thickness in vacuum is
Pb. PMT 1999, 2001; MH CET 2000; MP PET 2001] (a) 0.64 (b) 0.80
all media are parallel. If the emergent ray CD is parallel to the [RPMT 1995]
(c) 1.20 (d) 1.44
(a) 4  10 11 (b) 2  10 11 incident ray AB, we must have
(a) 2 mm (b) 2 cm
72. Stars are twinkling due to [CPMT 1997]
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001]
(c) 16  10 11 (d) 8  10 10 (a) Diffraction (b) Reflection
(c) 2 m (d) 2 km
57. A plane glass slab is kept over various coloured letters, the letter (a) 1  2 82. The wavelength of light in air and some other medium are
(c) Refraction (d) Scattering
which appears least raised is D respectively  a and  m . The refractive index of medium is
(b) 2  3 1 2 3 4 73. A thin oil layer floats on water. A ray of light making an angle of
[J & K CET 2004; BHU 1998, 05] [RPMT 2003]
incidence of 40° shines on oil layer. The angle of refraction of light
(a) Blue (b) Violet (c) 3  4 B C ray in water is ( oil  1.45, water  1.33 ) (a)  a / m (b) m /  a
(c) Green (d) Red  a  m
(d) 4  1 A [MP PMT 1993] (c) (d) None of these
58. A ray of light is incident on the surface of separation of a medium (a) 36 .1° (b) 44.5° 83. An astronaut in a spaceship see the outer space as
at an angle 45° and is refracted in the medium at an angle 30°. 65. The reason of seeing the Sun a little before the sunrise is
What will be the velocity of light in the medium[AFMC 1998; MH CET (Med.) 1999] (c) 26. 8° (d) 28.9° [CPMT 1990, MP PMT 1991; JIPMER 1997]
[MP PMT 2001; Orissa JEE 2003]
(a) White (b) Black
 1666 Ray Optics 1668 Ray Optics

(c) Blue (d) Red (d) He has to direct the beam at an angle to the vertical which is 9. For total internal reflection to take place, the angle of incidence i (c) Total internal reflection of light
84. Speed of light is maximum in slightly more than the critical angle of incidence for the total and the refractive index  of the medium must satisfy the (d) Diffraction of light
[CPMT 1990; MP PMT 1994; AFMC 1996]
internal reflection inequality [MP PET 1994] 18. A ray of light travelling in a transparent medium falls on a surface
3. Finger prints on a piece of paper may be detected by sprinkling separating the medium from air at an angle of incidence of 45°. The
(a) Water (b) Air 1 1
fluorescent powder on the paper and then looking it into (a)  (b)  ray undergoes total internal reflection. If n is the refractive index of
(c) Glass (d) Diamond sin i sin i
(a) Mercury light (b) Sunlight the medium with respect to air, select the possible value (s) of n
85. Which one of the following statements is correct (c) Infrared light (d) Ultraviolet light (c) sin i   (d) sin i   from the following
[KCET 1994]
4. Critical angle of light passing from glass to air is minimum for [N [IIT-JEE 1998]
(a) In vacuum, the speed of light depends upon frequency 10. Total internal reflection of light is possible when light enters from [CPMT 1973; MP PMT 1994]
(a) Red (b) Green (a) 1.3 (b) 1.4
(b) In vacuum, the speed of light does not depend upon frequency (a) Air to glass (b) Vacuum to air
(c) Yellow (d) Violet (c) 1.5 (d) 1.6
(c) In vacuum, the speed of light is independent of frequency and
wavelength 5. The wavelength of light in two liquids ‘x' and ‘y' is 3500 Å and (c) Air to water (d) Water to air
19. When a ray of light emerges from a block of glass, the critical angle
(d) In vacuum, the speed of light depends upon wavelength 7000 Å, then the critical angle of x relative to y will be is [KCET 1994]
11. Total internal reflection of a ray of light is possible when the ( ic =
(a) 60° (b) 45°
86. If the wavelength of light in vacuum be  , the wavelength in a (a) Equal to the angle of reflection
medium of refractive index n will be (c) 30° (d) 15° critical angle, i  angle of incidence)
(b) The angle between the refracted ray and the normal
[UPSEAT 2001; MP PET 2001] 6. A fish is a little away below the surface of a lake. If the critical angle [NCERT 1977; MP PMT 1994]
is 49°, then the fish could see things above the water surface within (c) The angle of incidence for which the refracted ray travels along
 (a) Ray goes from denser medium to rarer medium and i  ic the glass-air boundary
(a) n (b) an angular range of  o where
n (d) The angle of incidence
[MP PMT 1986] (b) Ray goes from denser medium to rarer medium and i  ic
 20. The phenomenon utilised in an optical fibre is
(c) (d) n  (c) Ray goes from rarer medium to denser medium and i  ic
(a)   49 o Air
2

n2 [KCET 1994; AMU 1995;

87. In vacuum the speed of light depends upon [MP PMT 2001] (b)   90 o
(d) Ray goes from rarer medium to denser medium and i  ic CBSE PMT 2001; DCE 1999, 2000, 01, 02; AIEEE 2002]
(a) Frequency Water (a) Refraction (b) Interference
(c)   98 o 
12. A diver at a depth of 12m in water (   4 / 3) sees the sky in a
(b) Wave length (c) Polarization (d) Total internal reflection
1 o cone of semi-vertical angle
(c) Velocity of the source of light (d)   24 21. The refractive index of water is 4 / 3 and that of glass is 5/3. What
2 [KCET 1999; Pb. PMT 2002; MP PMT 1995, 2003]
(d) None of these will be the critical angle for the ray of light entering water from the
7. If the critical angle for total internal reflection from a medium to (a) sin1 (4 / 3) (b) tan 1 (4 / 3) glass [RPMT 1996]
88. A transparent cube of 15 cm edge contains a small air bubble. Its
apparent depth when viewed through one face is 6 cm and when vacuum is 30°, the velocity of light in the medium is [CP 4 5
viewed through the opposite face is 4 cm. Then the refractive index KCET 2000; BCECE 2003; RPMT 2003] (c) sin1 (3 / 4 ) (d) 90° (a) sin1 (b) sin1
5 4
of the material of the cube is
(a) 3  10 8 m/s (b) 1.5  10 8 m/s 13. Critical angle is that angle of incidence in the denser medium for 1 2
[CPMT 2004; MP PMT 2005]
which the angle of refraction in rarer medium is (c) sin1 (d) sin1
(a) 2.0 (b) 2.5 (c) 6  10 8 m/s (d) 3  10 8 m/s 2 1
[MP PMT 1996] 22. Total internal reflection is possible when light rays travel
(c) 1.6 (d) 1.5 8. A ray of light is incident at an angle i from denser to rare medium.
The reflected and the refracted rays are mutually perpendicular. The (a) 0° (b) 57° [RPMT 1999]
89. A glass slab of thickness 3 cm and refractive index 3/2 is placed on
ink mark on a piece of paper. For a person looking at the mark at a angle of reflection and the angle of refraction are respectively r and (c) 90° (d) 180° (a) Air to water (b) Air to glass
r’, then the critical angle will be
distance 5.0 cm above it, the distance of the mark will appear to be [Kerala PMT 2005] 14. The critical angle for diamond (refractive index = 2) is (c) Glass to water (d) Water to glass
(a) 3.0 cm (b) 4.0 cm CBSE PMT 1996; MP PMT 1985, 99; Pb. PET 2002] [MP PET 2003] 23. The velocity of light in a medium is half its velocity in air. If ray of
(c) 4.5 cm (d) 5.0 cm (a) sin1 (sin r) (a) About 20° (b) 60° light emerges from such a medium into air, the angle of incidence,
90. A fish at a depth of 12 cm in water is viewed by an observer on the i r (c) 45° (d) 30° at which it will be totally internally reflected, is
(b) sin1 (tan r' ) [Roorkee 1999]
bank of a lake. To what height the image of the fish is raised. [MP PET 2005] 15. The reason for shining of air bubble in water is
(a) 9 cm (b) 12 cm (c) sin1 (tan i) [MP PET 1997; KCET 1999]
(a) 15 o
(b 30 o

(c) 3.8 cm (d) 3 cm r1 (c) 45 o

(d) 60 o

(d) tan 1 (sin i) (a) Diffraction of light

24. A ray of light propagates from glass (refractive index = 3/2) to water
(b) Dispersion of light (refractive index = 4/3). The value of the critical angle [JIPMER 1999; UPSEAT 200
Total Internal Reflection
(c) Scattering of light
 8
1. A cut diamond sparkles because of its (d) Total internal reflection of light (a) sin (1/2)
–1
(b) sin1  
 9 
 
[NCERT 1974; RPET 1996; AFMC 2005] 16. With respect to air critical angle in a medium for light of red colour
(a) Hardness [1 ] is . Other facts remaining same, critical angle for light of (c) sin1 (8 / 9) (d) sin1 (5 / 7)
yellow colour [2 ] will be [MP PET 1999] 25. Relation between critical angles of water and glass is
(b) High refractive index
[CBSE PMT 2000; Pb. PET 2000; CPMT 2001]
(c) Emission of light by the diamond (a)  (b) More than  (a) C > C (b) C < C
w g w g

(d) Absorption of light by the diamond (c) C = C (d) C = C = 0

1
(c) Less than 
w g w g

2. A diver in a swimming pool wants to signal his distress to a person (d) 26. If critical angle for a material to air is 30 , the refractive index of the
2
o

lying on the edge of the pool by flashing his water proof flash light [NCERT 1972] material will be [MP PET 2001]
(a) He must direct the beam vertically upwards 17. 'Mirage' is a phenomenon due to (a) 1.0 (b) 1.5
(b) He has to direct the beam horizontally [AIIMS 1998; MP PET 2002; AFMC 2003] (c) 2.0 (d) 2.5
(c) He has to direct the beam at an angle to the vertical which is (a) Reflection of light 27. The refractive index of water is 1.33. The direction in which a man under
slightly less than the critical angle of incidence for total internal water should look to see the setting sun is
(b) Refraction of light
reflection
 Ray Optics 1669 1670 Ray Optics
[MP PET 1991; Kerala PET 2002; Pb. PET 2003] (a) Yellow, orange, red 42. A normally incident ray reflected at an angle of 90 o . The value of [CPMT 1989; MP PET 1997; KCET 1998]
(a) 49 to the horizontal
o
(b) 90 with the vertical
o

(b) Violet, indigo, blue critical angle is [RPMT 1996] f I I

(c) 49 to the vertical
o
(d) Along the horizontal (a) and (b) f and
(c) All colours (a) 45 o (b 90 o 2 2 4
28. Optical fibres are related with [AFMC 2002]
(a) Communication (b) Light (d) All colours except green (c) 65 o (d) 43.2 o 3f I 3I
(c) and (d) f and
(c) Computer (d) None of these 36. Material A has critical angle i A , and material B has critical angle 43. The phenomena of total internal reflection is seen when angle of 4 2 4
29. Brilliance of diamond is due to iB (iB  i A ). Then which of the following is true incidence is [RPMT 2001] 4. A lens of power + 2 diopters is placed in contact with a lens of
[AIIMS 2002; MP PMT 2003] power – 1 diopter. The combination will behave like
(a) Shape (b) Cutting (i) Light can be totally internally reflected when it passes from B (a) 90 o (b Greater than critical angle
to A (a) A convergent lens of focal length 50 cm
(c) Reflection (d) Total internal reflection (c) Equal to critical angle (d) 0 o
30. A light ray from air is incident (as shown in figure) at one end of a (ii) Light can be totally internally reflected when it passes from A (b) A divergent lens of focal length 100 cm
to B 44. A fish looking up through the water sees the outside world
glass fiber (refractive index  = 1.5) making an incidence angle of 60 o

4 (c) A convergent lens of focal length 100 cm

on the lateral surface, so that it undergoes a total internal reflection. (iii) Critical angle for total internal reflection is iB  i A contained in a circular horizon. If the refractive index of water is
3 (d) A convergent lens of focal length 200 cm
How much time would it take to traverse the straight fiber of length
1 km  sin i A  and the fish is 12 cm below the surface, the radius of this circle in 5. A convex lens of focal length 40 cm is in contact with a concave lens
(iv) Critical angle between A and B is sin1  
 cm is of focal length 25 cm. The power of combination is
[Orissa JEE 2002]  sin iB 
[NCERT 1980; KCET 2002; AIEEE 2005; CPMT 2005]
(a) 3.33  sec Air
[UPSEAT 2004]
[IIT-JEE 1982; AFMC 1997; CBSE PMT 2000; RPMT 2003]

(b) 6.67  sec (a) (i) and (iii) (b) (i) and (iv) (a) 36 5 (b) 4 5 (a) – 1.5 D (b) – 6.5 D
Air o
60
(c) 5.77  sec Glass (c) (ii) and (iii) (d) (ii) and (iv) (c) 36 7 (d) 36 / 7 (c) + 6.5 D (d) + 6.67 D

In the figure shown, for an angle of incidence 45 o , at the top 6. Two lenses are placed in contact with each other and the focal
(d) 3.85  sec 37. 45. A point source of light is placed 4 m below the surface of water of
refractive index 5 / 3. The minimum diameter of a disc which should length of combination is 80 cm. If the focal length of one is 20 cm,
31. Light wave enters from medium 1 to medium 2. Its velocity in 2 nd surface, what is the minimum refractive index needed for total then the power of the other will be
medium is double from 1 . For total internal reflection the angle of
st internal reflection at vertical face [DCE 2002] be placed over the source on the surface of water to cut–off all light
incidence must be greater than [CPMT 2002] coming out of water is [NCERT 1981]
2 1 [CBSE PMT 1994; JIPMER 2001, 02] (a) 1.66 D (b) 4.00 D
(a) 30 o
(b) 60 o
(a)
2
(c) 45 o
(d) 90 o
45° (a) 2 m (b 6m (c) –1.00 D (d) – 3.75 D
Air
32. Consider telecommunication through optical fibres. Which of the 3 (c) 4 m (d) 3 m 7. Two similar plano-convex lenses are combined together in three
following statements is not true (b
2 46. A fist looking from within water sees the outside world through a different ways as shown in the adjoining figure. The ratio of the
[AIEEE 2003]  focal lengths in three cases will be
(a) Optical fibres may have homogeneous core with a suitable 1 circular horizon. If the fish 7 cm below the surface of water, what
cladding (c) will be the radius of the circular horizon [Kerala PMT 2005]
2
(b) Optical fibres can be of graded refractive index (a) 3.0 cm (b) 4.0 cm
(c) Optical fibres are subject to electromagnetic interference from (d) 2 1
(c) 4.5 cm (d) 5.0 cm
outside 38. Critical angle for light going from medium (i) to (ii) is . The speed
(d) Optical fibres have extremely low transmission loss of light in medium (i) is v then speed in medium (ii) is Refraction at Curved Surface (a) 2 : 2 : 1 (b 1:1:1
33. The critical angle for a medium is 60 o . The refractive index of the [DCE 2002]
medium is 1. The radius of curvature for a convex lens is 40 cm, for each surface. (c) 1 : 2 : 2 (d) 2 : 1 : 1
[MP PMT 2004] (a) v(1  cos  ) (b v / sin
Its refractive index is 1.5. The focal length will be
2 2 8. Two lenses of power +12 and – 2 diopters are placed in contact.
(a) (b) (c) v / cos  (d) v(1  sin ) [MP PMT 1989]
3 3 What will the focal length of combination
39. If light travels a distance x in t 1 sec in air and 10 x distance in (a) 40 cm (b) 20 cm
[MP PET 1990; MNR 1987;
3 t 2 sec in a medium, the critical angle of the medium will be (c) 80 cm (d) 30 cm
(c) 3 (d) MH CET (Med.) 2001; UPSEAT 2000; Pb. PMT 2003]
2
t  t  2. A convex lens of focal length f is placed somewhere in between an (a) 10 cm (b) 12.5 cm
34. Glass has refractive index  with respect to air and the critical angle (a) tan 1  1  (b) sin1  1 
  object and a screen. The distance between the object and the screen
for a ray of light going from glass to air is . If a ray of light is  t2   t2  (c) 16.6 cm (d) 8.33 cm
is x . If the numerical value of the magnification produced by the
incident from air on the glass with angle of incidence , the 9. A concave and convex lens have the same focal length of 20 cm and
 10 t 1   10 t 1  lens is m , , then the focal length of the lens is
corresponding angle of refraction is (c) sin1  
 (d) tan 1  
 are put into contact to form a lens combination. The combination is
[MP PMT 2004]  t2   t2  mx mx used to view an object of 5 cm length kept at 20 cm from the lens
(a) (b)
(m  1)2 (m  1)2 combination. As compared to the object, the image will be [CP
 1  40. The critical angle of a medium with respect to air is 45 o . The
1   o
(a) sin (b) 90 refractive index of medium is [MH CET 2003]
   (m  1)2
(m  1) 2 (a) Magnified and inverted
  (a) 1.41 (b) 1.2 (c) x (d) x
m m (b) Reduced and erect
 1  1 (c) 1.5 (d) 2
(c) sin1  2  (d) sin1   3. A thin lens focal length f1 and its aperture has diameter d. It forms (c) Of the same size as the object and erect
 
   41. An endoscope is employed by a physician to view the internal parts
of a body organ. It is based on the principle of an image of intensity I. Now the central part of the aperture upto (d) Of the same size as the object but inverted
35. White light is incident on the interface of glass and air as shown in d
[AIIMS 2004] diameter is blocked by an opaque paper. The focal length and
the figure. If green light is just totally internally reflected then the 10. If in a plano-convex lens, the radius of curvature of the convex surface is
(a) Refraction (b) Reflection 2
emerging ray in air contains 10 cm and the focal length of the lens is 30 cm, then the refractive index
image intensity will change to
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004] (c) Total internal reflection (d) Dispersion of the material of lens will be

Air Green

Glass

White
 Ray Optics 1671 1672 Ray Optics
[CPMT 1986; MNR 1988; MP PMT 2002; UPSEAT 2000] [CPMT 1974, 77; MP PMT 1992] (b) At 3f / 2, real and inverted (b) 2 concave lenses
(a) 1.5 (b) 1.66 (a) 15 cm (b) 10 cm (c) At 2f, virtual and erect (c) 1 convex lens and 1 concave lens
(c) 30 cm (d) 60 cm (d) None of these (d) Convex lens and plane mirror
(c) 1.33 (d) 3 19. A glass lens is placed in a medium in which it is found to behave 38. A plano convex lens ( f  20cm) is silvered at plane surface. Now f
29. A double convex thin lens made of glass (refractive index  = 1.5)
11. The slit of a collimator is illuminated by a source as shown in the like a glass plate. Refractive index of the medium will be has both radii of curvature of magnitude 20 cm. Incident light rays will be [BHU 1995; DPMT 2001; MP PMT 2005]
adjoining figures. The distance between the slit S and the collimating (a) Greater than the refractive index of glass parallel to the axis of the lens will converge at a distance L such that (a) 20 cm (b) 40 cm
lens L is equal to the focal length of the lens. The correct direction (b) Smaller than the refractive index of glass [MNR 1991; MP PET 1996; UPSEAT 2000; Pb PET 2004] (c) 30 cm (d) 10 cm
of the emergent beam will be as shown in figure [CPMT
(c) Equal 1986]
to refractive index of glass (a) L = 20 cm (b) L = 10 cm 39. If the central portion of a convex lens is wrapped in black paper as
(c) L = 40 cm (d) L = 20 / 3 cm shown in the figure
(d) No case will be possible from above [Manipal MEE 1995; KCET 2001]
1 2 3 30. A lens behaves as a converging lens in air and a diverging lens in
20. If I1 and I2 be the size of the images respectively for the two water. The refractive index of the material is
positions of lens in the displacement method, then the size of the [CPMT 1991; NCERT 1979; BHU 2005]
object is given by [CPMT 1988] (a) Equal to unity (b) Equal to 1.33
S L S L S L (c) Between unity and 1.33 (d) Greater than 1.33
(a) I1 / I2 (b) I1  I2
31. A biconvex lens forms a real image of an object placed perpendicular
to its principal axis. Suppose the radii of curvature of the lens tend (a) No image will be formed by the remaining portion of the lens
(a) 1 (b) 3 (c) I1  I2 (d) I1 / I2 to infinity. Then the image would (b) The full image will be formed but it will be less bright
(c) 2 (d) None of the figures 21. A convex lens of crown glass ( n =1.525) will behave as a divergent [MP PET 1994]
(c) The central portion of the image will be missing
12. A converging lens is used to form an image on a screen. When lens if immersed in [CPMT 1984] (a) Disappear
(d) There will be two images each produced by one of the exposed
upper half of the lens is covered by an opaque screen (a) Water (n =1.33) (b) Remain as real image still portions of the lens
[IIT-JEE 1986; SCRA 1994; (c) Be virtual and of the same size as the object 40. A diminished image of an object is to be obtained on a screen 1.0 m
(b) In a medium of n = 1.525
MP PET 1996; MP PMT 2004; BHU 1998, 05] (d) Suffer from aberrations from it. This can be achieved by appropriately placing
(c) Carbon disulphide n =1.66 32. The radius of curvature of convex surface of a thin plano-convex
(a) Half the image will disappear (a) A convex mirror of suitable focal length
(d) It cannot act as a divergent lens lens is 15 cm and refractive index of its material is 1.6. The power of (b) A concave mirror of suitable focal length
(b) Complete image will be formed of same intensity the lens will be [MP PMT 1994]
22. A divergent lens will produce [CPMT 1984] (c) A concave lens of suitable focal length
(c) Half image will be formed of same intensity (a) 1 D (b) 2 D
(a) Always a virtual image (d) A convex lens of suitable focal length less than 0.25 m
(d) Complete image will be formed of decreased intensity The focal length of convex lens is 30 cm and the size of image is
(b) Always real image (c) 3D (d)  4 D 41.
13. A thin convex lens of focal length 10 cm is placed in contact with a quarter of the object, then the object distance is
concave lens of same material and of same focal length. The focal (c) Sometimes real and sometimes virtual 33. Focal length of a convex lens will be maximum for [AFMC 1995]
length of combination will be (d) None of the above [MP PMT 1994]
(a) 150 cm (b) 60 cm
(a) Blue light (b) Yellow light
[CPMT 1972; 1988] 23. The minimum distance between an object and its real image formed (c) 30 cm (d) 40 cm
by a convex lens is (c) Green light (d) Red light
(a) Zero (b) Infinity [CPMT 1973; JIPMER 1997] 42. A convex lens forms a real image of a point object placed on its
34. A lens is placed between a source of light and a wall. It forms principal axis. If the upper half of the lens is painted black, the
(c) 10 cm (d) 20 cm (a) 1.5 f (b) 2 f images of area A1 and A2 on the wall for its two different image will [MP PET 1995]
14. A convex lens of focal length 84 cm is in contact with a concave lens positions. The area of the source or light is (a) Be shifted downwards (b) Be shifted upwards
(c) 2.5 f (d) 4 f
of focal length 12 cm. The power of combination (in diopters) is [MP PET 1991]
[CBSE PMT 1995] (c) Not be shifted (d) Shift on the principal axis
(a) 25/24 (b) 25/18 24. An object is placed at a distance of 20 cm from a convex lens of
1
focal length 10 cm. The image is formed on the other side of the lens A1  A2 1 1  43. In the figure, an air lens of radii of curvature 10 cm ( R1 = R 2 =
(c) – 50/7 (d) + 50/7 (a) (b)   
at a distance [CPMT 1971; RPET 2003] 10 cm) is cut in a cylinder of glass (  1.5) . The focal length and
15. A convex lens makes a real image 4 cm long on a screen. When the 2  A1 A2 
(a) 20 cm (b) 10 cm the nature of the lens is
lens is shifted to a new position without disturbing the object, we 2
again get a real image on the screen which is 16 cm tall. The length (c) 40 cm (d) 30 cm  A1  A2  [MP PET 1995; Pb. PET 2000]
of the object must be [MP PET 1991]
(c) A1 A2 (d)  
25. Two thin lenses, one of focal length + 60 cm and the other of focal  2 
(a) 1/4 cm (b) 8 cm length – 20 cm are put in contact. The combined focal length is [CPMT 1973, 89;
35. Two lenses of power 6D and – 2D are combined to form a single
(c) 12 cm (d) 20 cm (a) + 15 cm (b) – 15 cm lens. The focal length of this lens will be
Air Glass

16. A glass convex lens ( g  1.5) has a focal length of 8 cm when (c) + 30 cm (d) –30 cm [MP PET 2003]
placed in air. What would be the focal length of the lens when it is 26. A double convex lens of focal length 20 cm is made of glass of 3 1
(a) m (b m (a) 15 cm, concave
refractive index 3 / 2. When placed completely in water
immersed in water ( w  1.33 ) 2 4 (b) 15 cm, convex
(a w  4 / 3) , its focal length will be
[BHU 1994; MP PMT 1996] 1 (c)  , neither concave nor convex
[CBSE PMT 1990; MP PMT/PET 1998] (c) 4 m (d) m
(a) 2 m (b) 4 cm 8 (d) 0, concave
(c) 16 cm (d) 32 cm (a) 80 cm (b) 15 cm 36. A combination of two thin lenses with focal lengths f1 and f2 44. A lens (focal length 50 cm) forms the image of a distant object
(c) 17.7 cm (d) 22.5 cm respectively forms an image of distant object at distance 60 cm which subtends an angle of 1 milliradian at the lens. What is the size
17. The ray diagram could be correct [CPMT 1988]
27. Two thin lenses of focal lengths 20 cm and 25 cm are placed in when lenses are in contact. The position of this image shifts by 30 of the image [MP PMT 1995]
(a) If n1  n2  ng cm towards the combination when two lenses are separated by 10
contact convex. The effective power of the combination is (a) 5 mm (b) 1 mm
(b) If n1  n2 and n1  ng [CBSE PMT 1990; RPMT 2001] cm. The corresponding values of f1 and f2 are (c) 0.5[AIIMS
mm 1995] (d) 0.1 mm
ng
n1 (a) 45 dioptres (b) 9 dioptres (a) 30 cm, 60 cm (b) 20 cm , 30 cm
(c) If n1  n2 and n1  ng n2 45. A convex lens of focal length 12 cm is made of glass of  
3
.
(c) 1/9 dioptre (d) 6 dioptres (c) 15 cm, 20 cm (d) 12 cm, 15 cm 2
(d) Under no circumstances Lens
28. An object is placed at a distance of f / 2 from a convex lens. The 37. An achromatic combination of lenses is formed by joining 5
18. A thin convex lens of refractive index 1.5 has a focal length of 15 cm [BHU 1995; Pb. PMT 2000, 04] What will be its focal length when immersed in liquid of  
image will be [CPMT 1974, 89] 4
in air. When the lens is placed in liquid of refractive index 4/3 , its (a) 2 convex lenses
focal length will be (a) At one of the foci, virtual and double its size (a) 6 cm (b) 12 cm
 Ray Optics 1673 1674 Ray Optics

(c) 24 cm (d) 30 cm (c) 0.75 cm (d) 0.5 cm 65. A biconvex lens with equal radii curvature has refractive index 1.6 f
and focal length 10 cm. Its radius of curvature will be (a) nf [MP PET 2003] (b)
46. Two thin lenses of focal lengths f1 and f2 are in contact and 55. A symmetric double convex lens is cut in two equal parts by a plane n
perpendicular to the principal axis. If the power of the original lens (a) 20 cm (b) 16 cm
coaxial. The combination is equivalent to a single lens of power [MP PET 1996, 98; (c) (n  1) f (d) (n  1) f
was 4 D, the power of a cut lens will be (c) 10 cm (d) 12 cm
MP PMT 1998; DCE 2000; UP SEAT 2005] [MP PMT 1999] 66. A convex lens [RPMT 1997] 75. Two thin lenses whose powers are +2D and –4D respectively combine,
f1 f2 (a) 2 D (b) 3 D then the power of combination is
(a) f1  f2 (b) (a) Converges light rays
f1  f2 (c) 4 D (d) 5 D [AFMC 1998; CPMT 1996; Very Similar to BHU 2004]
(b) Diverges light rays
56. A plane convex lens is made of refractive index 1.6. The radius of (a) – 2D
1 f1  f2 (c) Form real images always (b) + 2D
(c) ( f1  f2 ) (d) curvature of the curved surface is 60 cm. The focal length of the
2 f1 f2 lens is [CBSE PMT 1999; (d) Always forms virtual images (c) – 4D (d) + 4D
47. A plano convex lens is made of glass of refractive index 1.5. The Pb. PMT 1999; BHU 2001; Very Similar to BHU 2003] 67. The focal length of a combination of lenses formed with lenses 76. A substance is behaving as convex lens in air and concave in water,
radius of curvature of its convex surface is R. Its focal length is cm 2003]
(a) 50[RPET (b) 100 cm having powers of + 2.50 D and – 3.75 D will be then its refractive index is [BHU 1998]
[RPMT 1997]
(a) R/ 2 (b) R (c) 200 cm (d) 400 cm (a) Smaller than air
(a) – 20 cm (b) – 40 cm
(c) 2R (d) 1.5 R 57. A concave lens of glass, refractive index 1.5, has both surfaces of
same radius of curvature R. On immersion in a medium of refractive (c) – 60 cm (d) – 80 cm (b) Greater than both air and water
48. Two lenses have focal lengths f1 and f2 and their dispersive index 1.75, it will behave as a 68. Focal length of a converging lens in air is R. If it is dipped in water (c) Greater than air but less than water
powers are 1 and  2 respectively. They will together form an [IIT-JEE 1999] of refractive index 1.33, then its focal length will be around
(Refractive index of lens material is 1.5) (d) Almost equal to water
achromatic combination if (a) Convergent lens of focal length 3.5 R
(b) Convergent lens of focal length 3.0 R [RPMT 1997; EAMCET (Med.) 1995] 77. A concave lens of focal length 20 cm placed in contact with a plane
(a) 1 f1  2 f2 (b) 1 f2  2 f1  0
(c) Divergent lens of focal length 3.5 R (a) R (b) 2R mirror acts as a [SCRA 1998]
(c) 1  f1  2  f2 (d) 1  f1  2  f2 (d) Divergent lens of focal length 3.0 R (c) 4R (d) R / 2 (a) Convex mirror of focal length 10 cm
49. The dispersive powers of glasses of lenses used in an achromatic 58. A convex lens of focal length 0.5 m and concave lens of focal length 69. Focal length of a convex lens of refractive index 1.5 is 2 cm. Focal
length of lens when immersed in a liquid of refractive index of 1.25 (b) Concave mirror of focal length 40 cm
pair are in the ratio 5 : 3. If the focal length of the concave lens is 15 1 m are combined. The power of the resulting lens will be [CP
cm, then the nature and focal length of the other lens would be will be [CBSE PMT 1993] (c) Concave mirror of focal length 60 cm
(a) 1 D[MP PET 1997] (b) – 1 D
(a) 10 cm (b) 2.5 cm
(a) Convex, 9 cm (b) Concave, 9 cm (c) 0.5 D (d) – 0.5 D (d) Concave mirror of focal length 10 cm
(c) 5 cm (d) 7.5 cm
(c) Convex, 25 cm (d) Concave, 25 cm 59. A double convex lens is made of glass of refractive index 1.5. If its
70. The focal length of a convex lens depends upon 78. A convex lens is used to form real image of an object on a screen. It
50. A thin double convex lens has radii of curvature each of magnitude focal length is 30 cm, then radius of curvature of each of its curved is observed that even when the positions of the object and that
40 cm and is made of glass with refractive index 1.65. Its focal surface is [Bihar CEET 1995] [AFMC 1994]
screen are fixed there are two positions of the lens to form real
length is nearly [MP PMT 1997] (a) 10 cm (b) 15 cm (a) Frequency of the light ray images. If the heights of the images are 4 cm and 9 cm respectively,
(a) 20 cm (b) 31 cm (c) 18 cm (d) None of these (b) Wavelength of the light ray the height of the object is
(c) 35 cm (d) 50 cm 60. A thin lens made of glass of refractive index 1.5 has a front surface + (c) Both (a) and (b) [AMU (Med.) 1999]
11 D power and back surface – 6 D. If this lens is submerged in a
51. The plane surface of a plano-convex lens of focal length f is silvered. (d) None of these
liquid of refractive index 1.6, the resulting power of the lens is (a) 2.25 cm (b 6.00 cm
It will behave as [MP PMT/PET 1998]
(a) – 0.5 D (b) + 0.5 D 71. If a convex lens of focal length 80 cm and a concave lens of focal
(a) Plane mirror length 50 cm are combined together, what will be their resulting (c) 6.50 cm (d) 36.00 cm
(c) – 0.625 D (d) + 0.625 D
(b) Convex mirror of focal length 2 f power [CBSE PMT 1996; AFMC 2002] 79. A convex lens of power + 6D is placed in contact with a concave
61. An object is placed first at infinity and then at 20 cm from the
(a) + 6.5D (b) – 6.5 D lens of power – 4D. What is the nature and focal length of the
(c) Concave mirror of focal length f / 2 object side focal plane of the convex lens. The two images thus
combination [AMU (Engg.) 1999]
formed are 5 cm apart. The focal length of the lens is (c) + 7.5 D (d) – 0.75 D
(d) None of the above (a) Concave, 25 cm (b) Convex, 50 cm
(a) 5 cm (b 10 cm 72. fv and fr are the focal lengths of a convex lens for violet and red
52. An equiconvex lens of glass of focal length 0.1 metre is cut along a (c) 15 cm (d) 20 cm (c) Concave, 20 cm (d) Convex, 100 cm
plane perpendicular to principle axis into two equal parts. The ratio light respectively and Fv and Fr are the focal lengths of a concave
of focal length of new lenses formed is 62. The distance between an object and the screen is 100 cm. A lens lens for violet and red light respectively, then 80. A double convex lens
[CBSEofPMT of  = 1.5 has radius of curvature of
glass1996]
produces an image on the screen when placed at either of the each of its surface is 0.2 m. The power of the lens is
[MP PET 1999; DPMT 2000]
positions 40 cm apart. The power of the lens is (a) fv  fr and Fv  Fr (b fv  fR and Fv  Fr
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 (a) + 10 dioptres (b) – 10 dioptres
[SCRA 1994]
(c) fc  fr and Fv  Fr (d) fv  fr and Fv  Fr (c) – 5 dioptres (d) +5 dioptres
1 (a)  3 dioptres (b)  5 dioptres
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 2 :
2 73. If a lens is cut into two pieces perpendicular to the principal axis 81. A lens of focal power 0.5 D is [JIPMER 1999]
(c)  7 diopters (d)  9 diopters
and only one part is used, the intensity of the image (a) A convex lens of focal length 0.5 m
53. A lens of refractive index n is put in a liquid of refractive index n' 63. The image distance of an object placed 10 cm in front of a thin lens
[CPMT 1996]
of focal length of lens in air is f , its focal length in liquid will be of focal[MP
length 5 cm is
PET+1999] [SCRA 1994] (b) A concave lens of focal length 0.5 m
(a) 6.5 cm (b) 8.0 cm 1 (c) A convex lens of focal length 2 m
fn' (n  1) f (n'n) (a) Remains same (b) times
(a)  (b)  (c) 9.5 cm (d) 10.0 cm 2
n'n n' (n  1) (d) A concave lens of focal length 2 m
64. A achromatic combination is made with a lens of focal length f and (c) 2 times (d) Infinite
n' (n  1) fn' n 82. A lens which has focal length of 4 cm and refractive index of 1.4 is
(c)  (d) dispersive power  with a lens having dispersive power of 2 . 1 immersed in a liquid of refractive index 1.6, then the focal length will
f (n'n) n  n' 74. A convex lens of focal length f produces an image times than
be [RPMT 1999]
The focal length of second will be n
54. An object of height 1.5 cm is placed on the axis of a convex lens of [RPET 1997] that of the size of the object. The distance of the object from the (a) – 12.8 cm (b) 32 cm
focal length 25 cm. A real image is formed at a distance of 75 cm lens is [BHU 1997; JIPMER 2001, 02]
from the lens. The size of the image will be (a) 2 f [MP PET 1999] (b) f /2 (c) 12.8 cm (d) – 32 cm
(a) 4.5 cm (b) 3.0 cm (c) f / 2 (d) – 2 f
 Ray Optics 1675 1676 Ray Optics

83. A convex lens has 9 cm focal length and a concave lens has – 18 cm 91. The focal length of a convex lens is 10 cm and its refractive index is [UPSEAT 2002] 108. A convex lens is dipped in a liquid whose refractive index is equal to
focal length. The focal length of the combination in contact will be 1.5. If the radius
[RPMT of curvature of one surface is 7.5 cm, the radius of
1999] (a) Greater than 40 cm (b) Equal to 40 cm the refractive index of the lens. Then its focal length will
(a) 9 cm (b) – 18 cm curvature of the second surface will be (a) Become infinite
(c) Equal to 10 cm (d) Less than 10 cm
[MP PMT 2000] (b) Become small, but non–zero
(c) – 9 cm (d) 18 cm
(a) 7.5 cm (b) 15.0 cm 101. A convex lens produces a real image m times the size of the object. (c) Remain unchanged
84. A double convex thin lens made of glass of refractive index 1.6 has What will be the distance of the object from the lens
radii of curvature 15 cm each. The focal length of this lens when (c) 75 cm (d) 5.0 cm (d) Become zero
immersed in a liquid of refractive index 1.63 is 92. [UPSEAT
A convex
2000;lens a focal length f. It is cut into two parts along the
has 2004]
Pb. PET
[JIPMER 2002] 109. An equiconvex lens is cut into two halves along (i) XOX and (ii)
dotted line as shown in the figure. The focal length of each part will YOY as shown in the figure. Let f, f , f  be the focal lengths of
(a) – 407 cm (b) 250 cm be m 1
[MP PET 2000] (a)  f (b) (m –1)f the complete lens, of each half in case (i), and of each half in case
(c) 125 cm (d) 25 cm f  m  (ii), respectively
(a)
85. A lens of power + 2 diopters is placed in contact with a lens of 2  m 1 m 1 Y
power – 1 diopoter. The combination will behave like (b) f (c)  f (d)
 m  f
[UPSEAT 2000] 3
(c) f 102. A convex lens is made up of three different materials as shown in
(a) A divergent lens of focal length 50 cm 2 the figure. For a point object placed on its axis, the number of X X
(d) 2f images formed are [KCET 2002] O
(b) A convergent lens of focal length 50 cm 93. An object has image thrice of its original size when kept at 8 cm
(a) 1
(c) A convergent lens of focal length 100 cm and 16 cm from a convex lens. Focal length of the lens is
(a) 8 cm (b) 5 Y  the following
Choose the correct statement from
(d) A divergent lens of focal length 100 cm (b) 16 cm (c) 4 [CBSE PMT 2003]
86. Chromatic aberration of lens can be corrected by (c) Between 8 cm and 16 cm
(d) Less than 8 cm
(d) 3 (a) f   2 f , f   f (b) f   f , f   f
[AFMC 2000] 103. An object is placed 12 cm to the left of a converging lens of focal
94. The combination of a convex lens (f = 18 cm) and a thin concave (c) f   2 f , f   2 f (d) f   f , f   2 f
(a) Reducing its aperature lens (f = 9 cm) is [AMU (Engg.) 2001] length 8 cm. Another converging lens of 6 cm focal length is placed
(a) A concave lens (f = 18 cm) at a distance of 30 cm to the right of the first lens. The second lens 110. The sun makes 0.5 angle on earth surface. Its image is made by
o

(b) Proper polishing of its two surfaces convex lens of 50 cm focal length. The diameter of the image will
(b) A convex lens (f = 18 cm) will produce [KCET 2002]
(c) Suitably combining it with another lens be [CPMT 2003]
(c) A convex lens (f = 6 cm) (a) No image (b) A virtual enlarged image
(d) Providing different suitable curvature to its two surfaces (a) 5 mm (b) 4.36 mm
(d) A concave lens (f = 6 cm)
(c) A real enlarged image (d) A real smaller image (c) 7 mm (d) None of these
87. The relation between n and n , if behaviour of light rays is as shown
1 2
95. A convex lens forms a real image of an object for its two different
in figure is [KCET 2000] positions on a screen. If height of the image in both the cases be 8 104. If convex lens of focal length 80cm and a concave lens of focal 111. The chromatic Aberration in lenses becomes due to
cm and 2 cm, then height of the object is length 50 cm are combined together, what will be their resulting [CPMT 2003]
(a) n1  n 2 [KCET 2000, 01] power [AFMC 2002] (a) Disimilarity of main axis of rays
(b n 2  n1 (a) 16 cm (b) 8 cm
n1 n2 (a) + 6.5 D (b) – 6.5 D (b) Disimilarity of radii of curvature
(c) 4 cm (d) 2 cm
(c) n1  n 2 (c) Variation of focal length of lenses with wavelength
96. A convex lens of focal length 25 cm and a concave lens of focal (c) + 7.5 D (d) – 0.75 D
length 10 cm are joined together. The power of the combination will (d) None of these
(d) n1  n 2 Lens be [MP PMT 2001] 105. A point object O is placed in front of a glass rod having spherical 112. If aperture of lens is halved then image will be [AFMC 2003]
(a) – 16 D (b) + 16 D end of radius of curvature 30 cm. The image would be formed at [Orissa JEE 2002]
88. A candle placed 25 cm from a lens, forms an image on a screen (a) No effect on size
placed 75 cm on the other end of the lens. The focal length and (c) – 6 D (d) + 6 D (a) 30 cm left (b) Intensity of image decreases
type of the lens should be [KCET 2000] 97. The unit of focal power of a lens is [KCET 2001] (c) Both (a) and (b)
(b) Infinity O Air Glass
(a) + 18.75 cm and convex lens (a) Watt (b) Horse power (d) None of these
(c) Dioptre (d) Lux (c) 1 cm to the right 30 cm
(b) – 18.75 cm and concave lens 15 cm 113. When the convergent nature of a convex lens will be less as
(c) + 20.25 cm and convex lens 98. A thin lens made of glass of refractive index  = 1.5 has a focal (d) 18 cm to the left compared with air [AFMC 2003]
length equal to 12 cm in air. It is now immersed in water (a) In water (b) In oil
(d) – 20.25 cm and concave lens 106. The focal length of lens of refractive index 1.5 in air is 30 cm. When
 4
89. We combined a convex lens of focal length f and concave lens of     . Its new focal length is [UPSEAT 2002] 4 (c) In both (a) and (b) (d) None of these
 3 it is immersed in a liquid of refractive index , then its focal
114. An achromatic combination of lenses produces
1

focal lengths f and their combined focal length was F. The 3

cm 2000]
(a) 48 [KCET (b) 36 cm
2

combination of these lenses will behave like a concave lens, if length in liquid will be [BHU 2002] [KCET 1993; JIPMER 1997]
(c) 24 cm (d) 12 cm (a) Coloured images
(a) f > f (b) f < f (a) 30 cm (b) 60 cm
1 2 1 2

99. Figure given below shows a beam of light converging at point P.

(c) f = f (d) f  f (c) 120 cm (d) 240 cm (b) Highly enlarged image
1 2 1 2
When a convex lens of focal length 16 cm is introduced in the path
of the beam at a place O shown by dotted line such that OP (c) Images in black and white
90. In a plano-convex lens the radius of curvature of the convex lens is 107. Two thin lenses of focal lengths f and f are in contact. The focal
becomes the axis of the lens, the beam converges at a distance x
1 2

10 cm. If the plane side is polished, then the focal length will be length of this combination is [MP PET 2002] (d) Images unaffected by variation of refractive index with
(Refractive index = 1.5) from the lens. The value x will be equal to wavelength
f1 f2 f1 f2
[CBSE PMT 2000; BHU 2004]
(a) 12 cm (a) (b) 115. In a parallel beam of white light is incident on a converging lens, the
(b) 24 cm f1  f2 f1  f2 colour which is brought to focus nearest to the lens is
(a) 10.5 cm (b 10 cm P
(c) 36 cm O 2 f1 f2 2 f1 f2 (a) Violet (b) Red
(c) 5.5 cm (d) 5 cm (d) 48 cm (c) (d)
f1  f2 f1  f2 (c) The mean colour (d) All the colours together
100. If two + 5 D lenses are mounted at some distance 12cm apart, the
cm cm
equivalent power will always be negative if the distance is
 Ray Optics 1677 1678 Ray Optics

116. A magnifying glass is to be used at the fixed object distance of 1 125. At what distance from a convex lens of focal length 30 cm, an object (a) 8.33 cm (b) 1.66 cm 144. A thin equiconvex lens is made of glass of refractive index 1.5 and its
inch. If it is to produce an erect image magnified 5 times its focal should be placed so that the size of the image be 1/2 of the object (c) 12.5 cm (d) 10 cm focal length is 0.2 m, if it acts as a concave lens of 0.5 m focal
length should be [MP PMT 1990] length when dipped in a liquid, the refractive index of the liquid is
(a) 30 cm (b) 60 cm 135. When light rays from the sun fall on a convex lens along a direction
(a) 0.2 inch (b) 0.8 inch 17 15
(c) 15 cm (d) 90 cm parallel to its axis [MP PMT 2004] (a) (b)
(c) 1.25 inch (d) 5 inch 8 8
126. A plano-convex lens is made of refractive index of 1.6. The radius of (a) Focal length for all colours is the same
117. A film projector magnifies a 100 cm film strip on a screen. If the
2
13 9
linear magnification is 4, the area of magnified film on the screen is curvature of the curved surface is 60 cm. The focal length of the
[NCERT 1980; (b Focal length for violet colour is the shortest (c) (d)
lens is [Pb. PET 2000] 8 8
CPMT 1977, 91; MP PET 1985, 89; RPMT 2001; BCEC 2005] (c) Focal length for yellow colour is the longest 145. The dispersive power of the material of lens of focal length 20 cm is
(a) 1600 cm 2
(b) 400 cm 2
(a) 400 cm (b) 200 cm (d) Focal length for red colour is the shortest 0.08. The longitudinal chromatic aberration of the lens is
(c) 800 cm 2
(d) 200 cm 2 (c) 100 cm (d) 50 cm 136. A convex lens is in contact with concave lens. The magnitude of the (a) 0.08 cm (b) 0.08/20 cm
118. An object placed 10 cm in front of a lens has an image 20 cm behind 127. The radius of the convex surface of plano-convex lens is 20 cm and ratio of their focal length is 2/3. Their equivalent focal length is 30 (c) 1.6 cm (d) 0.16 cm
the lens. What is the power of the lens (in dioptres) the refractive index of the material of the lens is 1.5. The focal length cm. What are their individual focal lengths [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2005]
[MP PMT 1995] of the lens is [CPMT 2004] Prism Theory & Dispersion of Light
(a) – 75, 50 (b) – 10, 15
(a) 1.5 (b) 3.0 (a) 30 cm (b) 50 cm 1. Which source is associated with a line emission spectrum
(c) 75, 50 (d) – 15, 10
(c) – 15.0 (d) + 15.0 (c) 20 cm (d) 40 cm [MP PET/PMT 1988; CBSE PMT 1993]
137. A thin glass (refractive index 1.5) lens has optical power of  5 D in
119. A beam of parallel rays is brought to a focus by a plano-convex lens. 128. A combination of two thin convex lenses of focal length 0.3 m and air. It's optical power in a liquid medium with refractive index 1.6 (a) Electric fire (b) Neon street sign
A thin concave lens of the same focal length is joined to the first 0.1 m will have minimum spherical and chromatic aberrations if the
lens. The effect of this is [KCET 2004] will be [AIEEE 2005] (c) Red traffic light (d) Sun
distance between them is [UPSEE 2004]
(a) The focal point shifts away from the lens by a small distance (a) 25 D (b) – 25 D 2. Formula for dispersive power is (where symbols have their usual
(a) 0.1 m (b 0.2 m
(b) The focus remains undisturbed (c) 1 D (d) None of these meanings) [MP PMT/PET 1988]
(c) 0.3 m (d) 0.4 m or
(c) The focus shifts to infinity 138. The plane faces of two identical plano-convex lenses each having
(d) The focal point shifts towards the lens by a small distance 129. A bi-convex lens made of glass (refractive index 1.5) is put in a liquid focal length of 40 cm are pressed against each other to form a usual If the refractive indices of crown glass for red, yellow and violet
120. A thin plano-convex lens acts like a concave mirror of focal length
of refractive index 1.7. Its focal length will convex lens. The distance from this lens, at which an object must be colours are respectively r , y and v , then the dispersive power
[UPSEAT 2004] placed to obtain a real, inverted image with magnification one is of this glass would be [MP PMT 1996]
0.2 m when silvered from its plane surface. The refractive index of
[NCERT 1980; CPMT 1981; MP PMT 1999; UPSEAT 1999]
the material of the lens is 1.5. The radius of curvature of the convex (a) Decrease and change sign v   y
(a) 80 cm (b 40 cm v   r
surface of the lens will be (a) (b)
(b Increase and change sign (c) 20 cm (d) 162 cm r  1 y  1
[KCET 2004]
(c) Decrease and remain of the same sign 139. If two lenses of +5 diopters are mounted at some distance apart, the
(a) 0.4 m (b 0.2 m equivalent power will always be negative if the distance is [BCECE
v   y 2005] v  r
(c) (d) 1
(c) 0.1 m (d) 0.75 m (d) Increase and remain of the same sign (a) Greater than 40 cm (b) Equal to 40 cm  y  r y
121. A point object is placed at the center of a glass sphere of radius 6 130. Spherical aberration in a lens [UPSEAT 2004] (c) Equal to 10 cm (d) Less than 10 cm
3. The critical angle between an equilateral prism and air is 45°. If the
cm and refractive index 1.5. The distance of the virtual image from (a) Is minimum when most of the deviation is at the first surface 140. A concave lens and a convex lens have same focal length of 20 cm incident ray is perpendicular to the refracting surface, then
the surface of the sphere is and both put in contact this combination is used to view an object 5
(b) Is minimum when most of the deviation is at the second cm long kept at 20 cm from the lens combination. As compared to (a) After deviation it will emerge from the second refracting
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004]
surface object the image will be surface
(a) 2 cm (b) 4 cm
(c) Is minimum when the total deviation is equally distributed over [CPMT 2005] (b) It is totally reflected on the second surface and emerges out
(c) 6 cm (d) 12 cm (a) Magnified and inverted perpendicularly from third surface in air
the two surface
122. In order to obtain a real image of magnification 2 using a (b Reduced and erect (c) It is totally reflected from the second and third refracting
(d) Does not depend on the above consideration surfaces and finally emerges out from the first surface
converging lens of focal length 20 cm, where should an object be (c) Of the same size and erect
placed [AFMC 2004] 131. The focal lengths of convex lens for red and blue light are 100 cm (d) Of the same size and inverted (d) It is totally reflected from all the three sides of prism and never
and 96.8 cm respectively. The dispersive power of material of lens is emerges out
(a) 50 cm (b) 30 cm [Pb. PET 2003]
141. The focal length of the field lens (which is an achromatic
combination of two lenses) of telescope is 90 cm. The dispersive 4. When white light passes through a glass prism, one gets spectrum
(c) – 50 cm (d) – 30 cm (a) 0.325 (b 0.0325 powers of the two lenses in the combination are 0.024 and 0.036. on the other side of the prism. In the emergent beam, the ray which
123. A plano-convex lens of refractive index 1.5 and radius of curvature (c) 0.98 (d) 0.968 The focal lengths of two lenses are is deviating least is or
30 cm is silvered at the curved surface. Now this lens has been used [CPMT 2005] Deviation by a prism is lowest for [MP PMT 1997]
132. The power of an achromatic convergent lens of two lenses is + 2 D.
to form the image of an object. At what distance from this lens an (a) 30 cm and 60 cm (b 30 cm and – 45 cm (a) Violet ray (b) Green ray
The power of convex lens is + 5D. The ratio of dispersive power of
object be placed in order to have a real image of the size of the (c) 45 cm and 90 cm (d) 15 cm and 45 cm
convex and concave lens will be (c) Red ray (d) Yellow ray
object [AIEEE 2004] 142. A combination of two thin lenses of the same material with focal
[Pb. PET 2003] 5. We use flint glass prism to disperse polychromatic light because
(a) 20 cm (b) 30 cm lengths f1 and f2 , arranged on a common axis minimizes
(a) 5 : 3 (b 3:5 light of different colours
(c) 60 cm (d) 80 cm chromatic aberration, if the distance between them is [EAMCET 2005]
[MP PET 1993]
(c) 2 : 5 (d) 5 : 2 ( f1  f2 ) ( f1  f2 )
124. A double convex lens (R1  R 2  10 cm) (  1.5) having focal (a) (b) (a) Travel with same speed
133. The focal lengths for violet, green and red light rays are fV , fG and 4 2
length equal to the focal length of a concave mirror. The radius of (b) Travel with same speed but deviate differently due to the shape
curvature of the concave mirror is f R respectively. Which of the following is the true relationship [BHU 2004; CBSE (c) ( f1  f2 ) (d) 2( f1  f2 ) of the prism
143. If the focal length of a double convex lens for red light is fR , its (c) Have different anisotropic properties while travelling through
[Orssia PMT 2004] (a) fR  fG  fV (b fV  fG  fR the prism
(a) 10 cm (b 20 cm focal length for the violet light is [EAMCET 2005]
(c) fG  fR  fV (d) fG  fV  fR (d) Travel with different speeds
(a) fR (b) Greater than fR
(c) 40 cm (d) 15 cm
134. Two lenses of power + 12 and – 2 diopters are placed in contact. The (c) Less than fR (d) 2 fR
combined focal length of the combination will be
 Ray Optics 1679 1680 Ray Optics

6. A prism (  1.5) has the refracting angle of 30°. The deviation of 16. The refractive index of a prism for a monochromatic wave is 2
26. Which of the following element was discovered by study of (a) Less than the emergent angle
a monochromatic ray incident normally on its one surface will be and its refracting angle is 60°. For minimum deviation, the angle of Fraunhofer lines
(b) Greater than the emergent angle
(sin 48° 36’ = 0.75) incidence will be (a) Hydrogen (b) Oxygen
[MP PMT/PET 1988] [MNR 1998; MP PMT 1989, 92, 2002; CPMT 1993, 2004] (c) Sum of angle of incidence and emergent angle is 90°
(c) Helium (d) Ozone
(a) 18° 36’ (b) 20° 30’ (a) 30° (b) 45° (d) Equal to the emergent angle
27. By placing the prism in minimum deviation position, images of the
(c) 18° (d) 22°1’ (c) 60° (d) 75°
spectrum 36. A circular disc of which 2/3 part is coated with yellow and 1/3 part is
7. Fraunhofer lines are obtained in 17. The ratio of angle of minimum deviation of a prism in air and when with blue. It is rotated about its central axis with high velocity, then
(a) Becomes inverted (b) Becomes broader
[CPMT 1973; MP PMT 1989; MP PMT 2004] dipped in water will be ( a  g  3 / 2 and a w  4 / 3 ) it will be seen as
(c) Becomes distinct (d) Becomes intensive
(a) Solar spectrum (a) 1/8 (b) 1/2 (a) Green (b) Brown
28. Our eye is most sensitive for which of the following wavelength
(b) The spectrum obtained from neon lamp (c) 3/4 (d) 1/4
(a) 4500 Å (c) White (d) Violet
(c) Spectrum from a discharge tube
18. The respective angles of the flint and crown glass prisms are A’ and
(d) None of the above (b) 5500 Å 37. The fine powder of a coloured glass is seen as
A. They are to be used for dispersion without deviation, then the
8. When light rays are incident on a prism at an angle of 45°, the ratio of their angles A' /A will be (c) 6500 Å (a) Coloured (b) White
minimum deviation is obtained. If refractive index of the material of
[MP PMT 1989] (d) Equally sensitive for all wave lengths of visible spectrum (c) That of the glass colour (d) Black
prism is 2 , then the angle of prism will be
( y  1) ( y '1) 29. Three prisms of crown glass, each have angle of prism 9° and two 38. When a white light passes through a hollow prism, then
[MP PMT 1986] (a)  (b)
( y '1) ( y  1) prisms of flint glass are used to make direct vision spectroscope.
(a) 30° (b) 40° [MP PMT 1987]
What will be the angle of flint glass prisms if  for flint is 1.60 and
(c) 50° (d) 60° (c) (y '1) (d) (y  1)  for crown glass is 1.53 (a) There is no dispersion and no deviation
9. A spectrum is formed by a prism of dispersive power '  ' . If the 19. The number of wavelengths in the visible spectrum (a) 11.9° (b) 16.0°
(b) Dispersion but no deviation
angle of deviation is '  ' , then the angular dispersion is [MP PMT 1989] (c) Deviation but no dispersion
(c) 15.3° (d) 9.11°
[MP PMT 1989]
(a) 4000 (b) 6000 30. If the refractive indices of crown glass for red, yellow and violet (d) There is dispersion and deviation both
(a)  /  (b)  / 
39. The light ray is incidence at angle of 60° on a prism of angle 45°.
(c) 2000 (d) Infinite colours are 1.5140, 1.5170 and 1.5318 respectively and for flint glass
(c) 1/  (d)  20. The black lines in the solar spectrum during solar eclipse can be these are 1.6434, 1.6499 and 1.6852 respectively, then the dispersive When the light ray falls on the other surface at 90°, the refractive
10. Light from sodium lamp is passed through cold sodium vapours, the explained by [MP PMT 1989] powers for crown and flint glass are respectively [MPmaterial
index of the prism  and the angle of deviation  are
PET/PMTof1988]
spectrum of transmitted light consists of (a) 0.034 and 0.064 (b) 0.064 and 0.034 given by [DPMT 2001]
(a) Planck's law (b) Kirchoff's law
[MP PET 1989; RPMT 2001]
(c) Boltzmann's law (d) Solar disturbances (c) 1.00 and 0.064 (d) 0.034 and 1.0 (a)   2 ,   30 o (b)   1.5 ,   15 o
(a) A line at 5890 Å (b) A line at 5896 Å
21. The dispersive power is maximum for the material 31. The minimum temperature of a body at which it emits light is
(c) Sodium doublet lines (d) No spectral features
3 3
11. Angle of minimum deviation for a prism of refractive index 1.5 is (a) Flint glass (b) Crown glass (a) 1200°C (b) 1000°C (c)  ,   30 o (d)   ,   15 o
2 2
equal to the angle of prism. The angle of prism is (cos 41° = 0.75) [MP PET/PMT 1988] (c) 500°C (d) 200°C
(c) Mixture of both (d) None of the above
(a) 62° (b) 41° 32. Band spectrum is obtained when the source emitting light is in the 40. In dispersion without deviation
22. A light ray is incident by grazing one of the face of a prism and
(c) 82° (d) 31° form of or (a) The emergent rays of all the colours are parallel to the incident
after refraction ray does not emerge out, what should be the angle
12. In the formation of primary rainbow, the sunlight rays emerge at of prism while critical angle is C Band spectrum is characteristic of ray
minimum deviation from rain-drop after (b) Yellow coloured ray is parallel to the incident ray
(a) Equal to 2C (b) Less than 2C [CPMT 1988; MP PET 1994; DCE 2004; MP PET 2005]
[MP PET 1989]
(c) More than 2C (d) None of the above (a) Atoms (b Molecules (c) Only red coloured ray is parallel to the incident ray
(a) One internal reflection and one refraction
23. A parallel beam of monochromatic light is incident at one surface of (c) Plasma (d) None of the above (d) All the rays are parallel, but not parallel to the incident ray
(b) One internal reflection and two refractions
(c) Two internal reflections and one refraction a equilateral prism. Angle of incidence is 55° and angle of emergence 33. Flint glass prism is joined by a crown glass prism to produce 41. Deviation of 5° is observed from a prism whose angle is small and
is 46°. The angle of minimum deviation will be dispersion without deviation. The refractive indices of these for whose refractive index is 1.5. The angle of prism is [M
(d) Two internal reflections and two refractions
13. Dispersive power depends upon [RPMT 1997] (a) Less than 41° (b) Equal to 41° mean rays are 1.602 and 1.500 respectively. Angle of prism of flint (a) 7.5° (b) 10°
prism is 10°, then the angle of prism for crown prism will be [DPMT 2001]
(a) The shape of prism (b) Material of prism (c) More than 41° (d) None of the above
(c) 5° (d) 3.3°
(c) Angle of prism (d) Height of the prism (a) 12°2.4' (b) 12°4’
24. The spectrum of light emitted by a glowing solid is
(c) 1.24° (d) 12° 42. The refractive indices of violet and red light are 1.54 and 1.52
14. When white light passes through the achromatic combination of (a) Continuous spectrum (b) Line spectrum
prisms, then what is observed respectively. If the angle of prism is 10°, then the angular dispersion
34. The angle of minimum deviation for a prism is 40° and the angle of is [MP PMT 1990]
(c) Band spectrum (d) Absorption spectrum
[MP PMT 1989] the prism is 60°. The angle of incidence in this position will be
(a) Only deviation (b) Only dispersion 25. Light rays from a source are incident on a glass prism of index of (a) 0.02 (b) 0.2
[EAMCET (Engg.) 1995; MH CET 1999; CPMT 2000]
(c) Deviation and dispersion (d) None of the above refraction  and angle of prism  . At near normal incidence, the
(a) 30° (b) 60° (c) 3.06 (d) 30.6
angle of deviation of the emerging rays is
15. The dispersion for a medium of wavelength  is D, then the
[MP PMT 1993] (c) 50° (d) 100° 43. The angle of minimum deviation measured with a prism is 30° and
dispersion for the wavelength 2 will be the angle of prism is 60°. The refractive index of prism material is
(a) (  2) (b) (  1) 35. In the position of minimum deviation when a ray of yellow light
[MP PET 1989]
passes through the prism, then its angle of incidence is
(a) D/8 (b) D/4 (a) 2 (b) 2
(c) (  1) (d) (  2) [MP PMT 1989; RPMT 1997]
(c) D/2 (d) D (c) 3/2 (d) 4/3
 Ray Optics 1681 1682 Ray Optics
44. If the refractive indices of a prism for red, yellow and violet colours (c) H 2
(d) Na 3
be 1.61, 1.63 and 1.65 respectively, then the dispersive power of the (b)
52. The band spectra (characteristic of molecular species) is due to 2
prism will be emission of radiation [CPMT 1982, 90]
[MP PET 1991; DPMT 1999] (a) Gaseous state (b) Liquid state (c) 2
(a) 1 (b) 2
1 .65  1 .62 1 .62  1 .61 (c) Solid state (d) All of three states
(c) 3 (d) None of these 4
(a) (b) (d)
1 .61  1 1 .65  1 53. Line spectrum was first of all theoretically explained by 3
61. Dispersion can take place for [MP PET 1992]
1 .65  1 .61 1 .65  1 .63 (a) Swan (b) Fraunhofer 68. A light ray is incident upon a prism in minimum deviation position
(c) (d) (a) Transverse waves only but not for longitudinal waves and suffers a deviation of 34°. If the shaded half of the prism is
1 .63  1 1 .61  1 (c) Kirchoff (d) Bohr
(b) Longitudinal waves only but not for transverse waves knocked off, the ray will [MP PMT 1992]
54. The spectrum of iodine gas under white light will be
45. The minimum deviation produced by a hollow prism filled with a (c) Both transverse and longitudinal waves (a) Suffer a deviation of 34°
certain liquid is found to be 30°. The light ray is also found to be (a) Only violet
(d) Neither transverse nor longitudinal waves (b) Suffer a deviation of 68°
refracted at angle of 30°. The refractive index of the liquid is [MP PET
(b) Bright lines1991]
(c) Suffer a deviation of 17°
(c) Only red lines 62. Emission spectrum of CO 2 gas [MP PET 1992]
(a) 2 (b) 3 (d) Not come out of the prism
(d) Some black bands in continuous spectrum (a) Is a line spectrum
69. A ray of monochromatic light is incident on one refracting face of a
3 3 55. Continuous spectrum is not due to (b Is a band spectrum
(c) (d) prism of angle 75°. It passes through the prism and is incident on
2 2 (a) Hydrogen flame (b) Electric bulb (c) Is a continuous spectrum the other face at the critical angle. If the refractive index of the
46. Minimum deviation is observed with a prism having angle of prism (c) Kerosene oil lamp flame (d) Candle flame (d) Does not fall in the visible region material of the prism is 2 , the angle of incidence on the first face
A, angle of deviation  , angle of incidence i and angle of emergence 56. Fraunhofer lines are produced by 63. A ray of light passes through an equilateral glass prism in such a of the prism is
e. We then have generally manner that the angle of incidence is equal to the angle of
(a) The element present in the photosphere of sun [EAMCET 1983]
[MP PET 1991] emergence and each of these angles is equal to 3/4 of the angle of
(b) The elements present in the chromosphere of the sun the prism. The angle of deviation is (a) 30° (b) 45°
(a) i > e (b) i < e
(c) The vapour of the element present in the chromosphere of the [MNR 1988; MP PMT 1999; Roorkee 2000; UPSEAT 2000; MP PET 2005]
(c) i = e (d) i = e =  (c) 60° (d) 0°
sun (a) 45° (b) 39°
47. A thin prism P with angle 4° and made from glass of refractive 70. Three glass prisms A, B and C of same refractive index are placed in
1 (d) The carbon dioxide present in the atmosphere (c) 20° (d) 30°
index 1.54 is combined with another thin prism P made from glass
2
contact with each other as shown in figure, with no air gap between
of refractive index 1.72 to produce dispersion without deviation. The 57. A medium is said to be dispersive, if [MP PMT 1990] 64. The true statement is the prisms. Monochromatic ray of light OP passes through the
angle of prism P is (a) The order of colours in the primary and the secondary prism assembly and emerges as QR. The conditions of minimum
2 (a) Light of different wavelengths propagate at different speeds
rainbows is the same deviation is satisfied in the prisms
[MP PMT 1991, 92; IIT-JEE 1990; MP PET 1995, 99;
(b) Light of different wavelengths propagate at same speed but has [CPMT 1988]
UPSEAT 2001; RPMT 2004] different frequencies (b) The intensity of colours in the primary and the secondary
(a) 2.6° (b) 3° rainbows is the same (a) A and C
(c) Light is gradually bent rather than sharply refracted at an
(c) The intensity of light in the primary rainbow is greater and the (b) B and C P
(c) 4° (d) 5.33° interface between the medium and air B
order of colours is the same than the secondary rainbow
48. An achromatic prism is made by combining two prisms (d) Light is never totally internally reflected (c) A and B A
(d) The intensity of light for different colours in primary rainbow
P1 (v  1.523, r  1.515) and P2 (v  1.666, r  1.650) ; C
58. A ray of light is incident at an angle of 60° on one face of a prism of is greater and the order of colours is reverse than the (d) In all prisms A, B and C
where  represents the refractive index. If the angle of the prism angle 30°. The ray emerging out of the prism makes an angle of 30° secondary rainbow O Q
P1 is 10°, then the angle of the prism P will be with the incident ray. The emergent ray is 71. The refractive index of a material of a prism of angles 45°– 45°R –
2 65. What will be the colour of sky as seen from the earth, if there were 90° is 1.5. The path of the ray of light incident normally on the
[MP PMT 1991] [EAMCET 1990; MP PMT 1990] no atmosphere [MP PMT 1992] hypotenuse side is shown in
(a) 5° (b) 7.8° (a) Normal to the face through which it emerges (a) Black (b) Blue [EAMCET 1985]

(c) 10.6° (d) 20° (b) Inclined at 30° to the face through which it emerges (c) Orange (d) Red A
A
66. When light emitted by a white hot solid is passed through a sodium (a) (b) 90°
49. Angle of a prism is 30° and its refractive index is 2 and one of (c) Inclined at 60° to the face through which it emerges 90°
flame, the spectrum of the emergent light will show
the surface is silvered. At what angle of incidence, a ray should be (d) None of these [MP PMT 1992]
incident on one surface so that after reflection from the silvered 45° 45° 45° 45°
59. In a thin prism of glass (refractive index 1.5), which of the following B C B C
surface, it retraces its path (a) The D1 and D2 bright yellow lines of sodium
relations between the angle of minimum deviations  m and angle A
A
[MP PMT 1991; UPSEAT 2001; CBSE PMT 2004] (b) Two dark lines in the yellow region (c) (d)
of refraction r will be correct 90°
90°
(a) 30° (b) 60° (c) All colours from violet to red
[MP PMT 1990]
(c) 45° (d) sin1 1.5 (d) No colours at all
(a) m  r (b)  m  1.5 r 45° 45° B
45° 45°
C
50. For a material, the refractive indices for red, violet and yellow colour 67. A prism ABC of angle 30° has its face AC silvered. A ray of light B C
light are respectively 1.52, 1.64 and 1.60. The dispersive power of the r incident at an angle of 45° at the face AB retraces its path after
(c)  m  2r (d)  m  72. At the time of total solar eclipse, the spectrum of solar radiation
material is [MP PMT 1991] 2 refraction at face AB and reflection at face AC. The refractive index would be [MP PMT 1990; RPMT 2004]
of the material of the prism is
(a) 2 (b) 0.45 60. The figures represent three cases of a ray passing through a prism (a) A large number of dark Fraunhofer lines
of angle A. The case corresponding to minimum deviation is [MP PMT 1992; EAMCET 2001]
(c) 0.2 (d) 0.045 (b) A less number of dark Fraunhofer lines
(a) 1.5 A (c) No lines at all
51. Band spectrum is produced by [CPMT 1978]
(a) H (b) He (d) All Fraunhofer lines changed into brilliant colours
Silvered
45°

(1) (2) (3)

B C
 Ray Optics 1683 1684 Ray Optics

73. Angle of deviation ( ) by a prism (refractive index =  and 81. A ray passes through a prism of angle 60° in minimum deviation (c) They are equal 97. For a medium, refractive indices for violet, red and yellow are 1.62,
supposing the angle of prism A to be small) can be given by position[MPand
PMTsuffers
1994] a deviation of 30°. What is the angle of (d) No relation 1.52 and 1.55 respectively, then dispersive power of medium will be
incidence on the prism [RPET 1997]
(a)   (  1) A (b)   (  1) A 88. White light is passed through a prism whose angle is 5°. If the
[MP PMT 1995; Pb. PMT 2001; RPMT 2003] (a) 0.65 (b) 0.22
refractive indices for rays of red and blue colour are respectively
A  1.64 and 1.66, the angle of deviation between the two colours will be (c) 0.18
[MP PET 1997] (d) 0.02
sin (a) 30° (b) 45°
2  1
(c)   (d)   A (a) 0.1 degree (b) 0.2 degree 98. Two lenses having f1 : f2  2 : 3 has combination to make no
sin
A  1 (c) 60° (d) 90°
2 (c) 0.3 degree (d) 0.4 degree dispersion. Find the ratio of dispersive power of glasses used
82. When light of wavelength  is incident on an equilateral prism
74. Angle of prism is A and its one surface is silvered. Light rays falling 89. From which source a continuous emission spectrum and a line (a) 2 : 3 (b) 3 : 2
kept in its minimum deviation position, it is found that the angle of
at an angle of incidence 2A on first surface return back through the absorption spectrum are simultaneously obtained (c) 4 : 9 (d) 9 : 4
same path after suffering reflection at second silvered surface. deviation equals the angle of the prism itself. The refractive index of
[MP PMT 1997]
Refractive index of the material of prism is the material the prism for the wavelength  is, then
[AIIMSof1995] 99. If refractive index of red, violet and yellow lights are 1.42, 1.62 and
(a) Bunsen burner flame 1.50 respectively for a medium. Its dispersive power will be
(a) 2 sin A (b) 2 cos A
3 (b) The sun (a) 0.4 (b) 0.3
1 (a) 3 (b)
(c) cos A (d) tan A 2 (c) Tube light (c) 0.2 (d) 0.1
2
(d) Hot filament of an electric bulb 100. A ray is incident at an angle of incidence i on one surface of a prism
75. A ray of light incident normally on an isosceles right angled prism (c) 2 (d) 2
travels as shown in the figure. The least value of the refractive index 90. A thin prism P1 with angle 6° and made from glass of refractive of small angle A and emerges normally from the opposite surface. If
of the prism must be 83. Which of the following diagrams, shows correctly the dispersion of index 1.54 is combined with another thin prism P of refractive index the refractive index of the material of the prism is  , the angle of
white light by a prism 2

1.72 to produce dispersion without deviation. The angle of prism incidence i is nearly equal to
[Manipal MEE 1995; BHU 2003]
A [NSEP 1994; MP PET 1996] P2 will be [MP PMT 1999] [CBSE PMT 1992]
(a) 2
(a) 5° 24’ (b) 4° 30’ (a) A /  (b) A / 2
(b) 3 (a) (b) V
V
(c) 6° (d) 8° (c) A (d) A / 2
(c) 1.5 R
90° 91. If the refractive index of a material of equilateral prism is 3 , then 101. Fraunhofer spectrum is a [KCET 1993, 94; RPET 1997;
(d) 2.0
C B R angle of minimum deviation of the prism is MP PET 1997, 2001; JIPMER 2000; AIIMS 2001]
76. When seen in green light, the saffron and green portions of our
[CBSE PMT 1999; Pb. PMT 2004; MH CET 2004] (a) Line absorption spectrum
National Flag will appear to be [Manipal MEE 1995]
(a) Black (a) 30° (b) 45° (b) Band absorption spectrum
(c) (d) V
(b) Black and green respectively (c) 60° (d) 75° (c) Line emission spectrum
R
R
(c) Green V 92. The splitting of white light into several colours on passing through a (d) Band emission spectrum
(d) Green and yellow respectively glass prism is due to [CPMT 1999]
84. A neon sign does not produce (a) Refraction (b) Reflection 102. The angle of a prism is 60° and its refractive index is 2 . The
77. At sun rise or sunset, the sun looks more red than at mid-day
angle of minimum deviation suffered by a ray of light in passing
because [AFMC 1995; Similar to DCE 2003] [MP PET 1996; UPSEAT 2004] (c) Interference (d) Diffraction through it is [MP PET 2003]
(a) The sun is hottest at these times (a) Line spectrum 93. A white screen illuminated by green and red light appears to be [KCET 1994; RPMT 1997]
(a) About 20° (b) 30°
(b) Of the scattering of light
(b) An emission spectrum (a) Green (b) Red
(c) Of the effects of refraction (c) 60° (d) 45°
(c) An absorption spectrum (c) Yellow (d) White
(d) Of the effects of diffraction 103. Colour of the sky is blue due to
94. Dark lines on solar spectrum are due to
78. Line spectrum contains information about [MP PET 1995] (d) Photons [CPMT 1996, 99; AFMC 1993; AIIMS 1999;
[EAMCET (Engg.) 1995]
(a) The atoms of the prism 85. The refractive index of flint glass for blue F line is 1.6333 and red C AIEEE 2002; BCECE 2003; BHU 2004]
(b) The atoms of the source line is 1.6161. If the refractive index for yellow D line is 1.622, the (a) Lack of certain elements
(a) Scattering of light (b) Total internal reflection
(c) The molecules of the source dispersive power of the glass is (b) Black body radiation
(c) Total emission (d) None of the above
(d) The atoms as well as molecules of the source (a) 0.0276 (b) 0.276 (c) Absorption of certain wavelengths by outer layers
104. Which of the following spectrum have all the frequencies from high
79. Missing lines in a continuous spectrum reveal (c) 2.76 (d) 0.106 (d) Scattering to low frequency range [CPMT 1996]
[MP PET 1995] 95. Line spectra are due to [EAMCET (Med.) 1995]
86. A triangular prism of glass is shown in the figure. A ray incident (a) Band spectrum (b) Continuous spectrum
(a) Defects of the observing instrument
normally to one face is totally reflected, if   45 o . The index of (a) Hot solids (c) Line spectrum (d) Discontinuous spectrum
(b) Absence of some elements in the light source
refraction of glass is [AIEEE 2004] (b) Atoms in gaseous state
(c) Presence in the light source of hot vapours of some elements 105. Stars are not visible in the day time because
(d) Presence of cool vapours of some elements around the light (a) Less than 1.41 (c) Molecules in gaseous state [JIPMER 1997]
source (b) Equal to 1.41 (d) Liquid at low temperature (a) Stars hide behind the sun
80. A source emits light of wavelength 4700Å, 5400 Å and 6500 Å. The 96. The path of a refracted ray of light in a prism is parallel to the base
(c) Greater than 1.41  (b) Stars do not reflect sun rays during day
light passes through red glass before being tested by a spectrometer. of the prism only when the [SCRA 1994]
Which wavelength is seen in the spectrum (d) None of the above (c) Stars vanish during the day
45o (a) Light is of a particular wavelength
[MP PMT 1995] (d) Atmosphere scatters sunlight into a blanket of extreme
87. The wavelength of emission line spectrum and absorption line (b) Ray is incident normally at one face
brightness through which faint stars cannot be visible
(a) 6500 Å (b) 5400 Å spectrum of a substance are related as (c) Ray undergoes minimum deviation
106. Which of the following colours suffers maximum deviation in a
(c) 4700 Å (d) All the above (a) Absorption has larger value (d) Prism is made of a particular type of glass prism [KCET 1998; DPMT 2000]
(b) Absorption has smaller value
 Ray Optics 1685 1686 Ray Optics

(a) Yellow (b) Blue 116. When a ray of light is incident normally on one refracting surface of (c) 60 o
(d) 50 o
(c) Dispersion and total internal reflection
an equilateral prism (Refractive index of the material of the prism = (d)2001;None of these
(c) Green (d) Orange 124. The spectrum obtained from an electric lamp or red hot heater is [BHU Pb. PET 2003]
1.5 [EAMCET (Med.) 2000]
107. If a thin prism of glass is dipped into water then minimum deviation (a) Line spectrum (b) Band spectrum 133. The Cauchy’s dispersion formula is [AIIMS 2002]
(a) Emerging ray is deviated by 30 o

(with respect to air) of light produced by prism will be left (a) n  A  B2  C4 (b) n  A  B2  C4
(b) Emerging ray is deviated by 45 o
(c) Absorption spectrum (d) Continuous spectrum
 3 4
 a  g  and a w   [UPSEAT 1999] (c) Emerging ray just grazes the second refracting surface 125. When a glass prism of refracting angle 60 is immersed in a liquid its
o
(c) n  A  B2  C4 (d) n  A  B2  C4
 2 3
(d) The ray undergoes total internal reflection at the second angle of minimum deviation is 30 . The critical angle of glass with respect
A prism of refractive index  and angle A is placed in the minimum
o

134.
1 1 refracting surface to the liquid medium is [EAMCET 2001]
(a) (b) deviation position. If the angle of minimum deviation is A, then the
2 4 117. Consider the following two statements A and B and identify the (a) 42 (b) 45 value of A in terms of  is
o o

correct choice in the given answers

1 [EAMCET (Engg.) 2000] (c) 50 o
(d) 52 o

[EAMCET 2003]
(c) 2 (d)
5 A: Line spectra is due to atoms in gaseous state 126. Three prisms 1, 2 and 3 have the prism angle A = 60 , but their

o

 1
108. The refractive indices for the light of violet and red colours of any B: Band spectra is due to molecules refractive indices are respectively 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6. If  ,  ,  be their (a) sin1   (b) sin1
2 2
1 2 3

material are 1.66 and 1.64 respectively. If the angle of prism made (a) Both A and B are false respective angles of deviation then
of this material is 10 , then angular dispersion will be
o

(b) A [UPSEAT 1999]

is true and B is false [MP PMT 2001]  
(a) 0.20 o
(b) 0.10 o

(c) A is false and B is true (c) 2 cos 1   (d) cos 1  

(a)  >  >  (b)  >  >  2 2
(c) 0.40 o
(d) 1 o
(d) Both A and B are true 3 2 1 1 2 3

135. A given ray of light suffers minimum deviation in an equilateral

109. The refractive index of the material of the prism for violet colour is 118. Under minimum deviation condition in a prism, if a ray is incident (c)  =  = 
1 2 3
(d)  >  > 
2 1 3
prism P. Additional prisms Q and R of identical shape and material
1.69 and that for red is 1.65. If the refractive index for mean colour at an angle 30 , the angle between the emergent ray and the second
o

are now added to P as shown in the figure. The ray will suffer
is 1.66, the dispersive power of the material of the prism [JIPMER 1999]
127. Which one of the following alternative is FALSE for a prism placed
refracting surface of the prism is
in a position of minimum deviation [MP PET 2001] [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2001; KCET 2003]
(a) 0.66 (b) 0.06 [EAMCET (Engg.) 2000]
(a) i = i (b) r = r (a) Greater deviation
(c) 0.65 (d) 0.69 (a) 0 o
(b) 30 o
1 2 1 2

Q
110. The deviation caused in red, yellow and violet colours for crown (c) i = r (d) All of these (b) Same deviation
(c) 45 (d) 60
1 1
o o

glass prism are 2.84 , 3.28 and 3.72 respectively. The dispersive
o o o

P R
128. In the visible region the dispersive powers and the mean angular (c) No deviation
power of prism material is 119. The angle of prism is 5 and its refractive indices for red and violet
o

deviations for crown and flint glass prisms are ,  and d, d (d) Total internal reflection
[KCET (Engg.) 1999] colours are 1.5 and 1.6 respectively. The angular dispersion
produced by the prism is [MP PMT 2000]
respectively. The condition for getting deviation without dispersion
(a) 0.268 (b) 0.368 136. In the given figure, what is the angle of prism
when the two prisms are combined is
(c) 0.468 (d) 0.568 (a) 7.75 o
(b) 5 o

[EAMCET 2001] [Orissa JEE 2003]

111. Dispersion of light is due to [DCE 1999]
(c) 0.5 o
(d) 0.17 o

(a) A C
(a) Wavelength (b) Intensity of light
120. If the refractive angles of two prisms made of crown glass are 10
(a) d   d   0 (b)  d  d   0
(b) B
o

(c) Density of medium (d) None of these

and 20 respectively, then the ratio of their colour deviation powers
o

112. A prism of refracting angle 60 is made with a material of refractive

o

(c) d   d   0 (d) (d )2  ( d )2  0 (c) C

will be
index . For a certain wavelength of light, the angle of minimum
deviation is 30 . For this, wavelength the value of refractive index of
o
[KCET 1999; AFMC 2001] 129. A ray of light passes through the equilateral prism such that angle (d) D
the material is of incidence is equal to the angle of emergence if the angle of A B
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 1
[CPMT 1999, MH CET 2000] incidence is 45 . The angle of deviation will be
o 137. A prism of refractive index 2 has a refracting angle of 60 . At o

(a) 1.231 (b) 1.820 (c) 4 : 1 (d) 1 : 2 what angle a ray must be incident on it so that it suffers a minimum
[Pb. PMT 2002]
(c) 1.503 (d) 1.414 121. The nature of sun’s spectrum is deviation [BHU 2003; MP PMT 2005]
(a) 15 o
(b) 75 o

113. Which of the prism is used to see infrared spectrum of light [MP PET 2000; MP PMT 2001]
(a) 45 o
(b) 60 o

[RPMT 2000]
(c) 60 o
(d) 30 o

(c) 90 o
(d) 180 o

(a) Continuous spectrum with absorption lines

(a) Rock Salt (b) Nicol 130. The solar spectrum during a complete solar eclipse is
138. A convex lens, a glass slab, a glass prism and a solid sphere all are
(c) Flint (d) Crown (b) Line spectrum
[Kerala PET 2002] made of the same glass, the dispersive power will be
114. When white light enters a prism, it gets split into its constituent (c) The spectrum of the helium atom
(a) Continuous (b) Emission line [CPMT 1986]
colours. This is due to [DCE 2000]
(d) Band spectrum (a) In the glass slab and prism
(a) High density of prism material (c) Dark line (d) Dark band
122. A ray of light is incident normally on one of the face of a prism of (b) In the lens and solid sphere
(b) Because  is different for different  131. Why sun has elliptical shape on the time when rising and sun
(c) Diffraction of light angle 30 and refractive index
o
2 . The angle of deviation will be setting ? It is due to [AFMC 2002] (c) Only in prism
(d) Velocity changes for different frequencies [KCET 2001]
(a) Refraction (b) Reflection (d) In all the four
115. The dispersive powers of crown and flint glasses are 0.02 and 0.04 (a) 26 o
(b) 0 o

(c) Scattering (d) Dispersion 139. A parallel beam of white light falls on a convex lens. Images of blue,
respectively. In an achromatic combination of lenses the focal length (c) 23 (d) 15
o o

yellow and red light are formed on other side of the lens at a
of flint glass lens is 40 cm. The focal length of crown glass lens will 132. In the formation of a rainbow light from the sun on water droplets
123. For a prism of refractive index 1.732, the angle of minimum distance of 0.20 m, 0.205 m and 0.214 m respectively. The dispersive
be [DCE 2000] undergoes [CBSE PMT 2000;
deviation is equal to the angle of the prism. The angle of the prism power of the material of the lens will be
(a) – 20 cm (b) + 20 cm Orissa JEE 2002; MP PET 2003; KCET 2004]
is [CBSE PMT 2001] (a) 619/1000 (b) 9/200
(c) – 10 cm (d) + 10 cm (a) Dispersion only
(a) 80 o
(b) 70 o

(c) 14/205 (d) 5/214

(b) Only total internal reflection
 Ray Optics 1687 1690 Ray Optics

140. The refractive index of the material of the prism for violet colour is 148. The spectrum obtained from a sodium vapour lamp is an example of (a) Real and inverted (b) Virtual and erect
1.69 and that for red is 1.65. If the refractive index for mean colour [MH CET 2003] (c) Real and erect (d) Virtual and inverted
is 1.66, the dispersive power of the material of the prism [JIPMER 1999] (a) Absorption spectrum (b) Emission spectrum 9. If there had been one eye of the man, then
(a) 0.66 (b 0.06 (c) Continuous spectrum (d) Band spectrum (a) Image of the object would have been inverted
(c) 0.65 (d) 0.69 149. The sky would appear red instead of blue if [DCE 2004] (b) Visible region would have decreased
(a) Atmospheric particles scatter blue light more than red light (c) Image would have not been seen three dimensional
141. If the angle of prism is 60 o and the angle of minimum deviation is
(b) Atmospheric particles scatter all colours equally (d) (b) and (c) both
40 o , the angle of refraction will be (c) Atmospheric particles scatter red light more than the blue light 10. A person cannot see distinctly at the distance less than one metre.
[MP PMT 2004] (d) The sun was much hotter Calculate the power of the lens that he should use to read a book at
a distance of 25 cm
(a) 30 o (b) 60 o 150. Sir C.V. Raman was awarded Nobel Prize for his work connected
with which of the following phenomenon of radiation [CPMT 1983; AFMC 2005] [CPMT 1977; MP PET 1985, 88; MP PMT 1990]
(c) 100 o
(d) 120 o
(a) Scattering (b) Diffraction (a) + 3.0 D (b) + 0.125 D
(c) Interference (d) Polarisation (c) – 3.0 D (d) + 4.0 D
142. The refractive index of a particular material is 1.67 for blue light,
1.65 for yellow light and 1.63 for red light. The dispersive power of 151. In absorption spectrum of Na the missing wavelength (s) are 11. How should people wearing spectacles work with a microscope
the material is ......... [KCET 2004] [BCECE 2005]
(a) They cannot use the microscope at all
(a) 0.0615 (b) 0.024 (a) 589 nm (b) 589.6 nm (b) They should keep on wearing their spectacles
(c) Both (d) None of these (c) They should take off spectacles
(c) 0.031 (d) 1.60
(d) (b) and (c) is both way
143. A ray of light is incident on an equilateral glass prism placed on a 12. A man who cannot see clearly beyond 5 m wants to see stars clearly.
horizontal table. For minimum deviation which of the following is Human Eye and Lens Camera
He should use a lens of focal length
true [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2004]
1. A far sighted man who has lost his spectacles, reads a book by [MP PET/PMT 1988; Pb. PET 2003]
(a) PQ is horizontal (a) – 100 m (b) + 5 m
R looking through a small hole (3-4 mm) in a sheet of paper. The
(b) QR is horizontal Q reason will be [CPMT 1977] (c) – 5 m (d) Very large
S
(c) RS is horizontal (a) Because the hole produces an image of the letters at a longer 13. A man can see only between 75 cm and 200 cm. The power of lens
P distance to correct the near point will be
(d) Either PQ or RS is horizontal
(b) Because in doing so, the focal length of the eye lens is (a) + 8/3 D (b) + 3 D
144. A beam of light composed of red and green ray is incident obliquely effectively increased (c) – 3 D (d) – 8/3 D
at a point on the face of rectangular glass slab. When coming out on (c) Because in doing so, the focal length of the eye lens is 14. Image is formed for the short sighted person at
the opposite parallel face, the red and green ray emerge from [CBSE PMT 2004]
effectively decreased [AFMC 1988]
(a) Two points propagating in two different directions (d) None of these (a) Retina (b) Before retina
(b) Two points propagating in two parallel directions 2. For a normal eye, the least distance of distinct vision is (c) Behind the retina (d) Image is not formed at all
(c) One point propagating in two different directions [CPMT 1984] 15. A man can see the objects upto a distance of one metre from his
(a) 0.25 m (b) 0.50 m eyes. For correcting his eye sight so that he can see an object at
(d) One point propagating in the same directions
(c) 25 m (d) Infinite infinity, he requires a lens whose power is
145. White light is passed through a prism ........... colour shows minimum or
3. For the myopic eye, the defect is cured by
deviation [Orissa PMT 2004]
[CPMT 1990; KCET (Engg.) 2000] A man can see upto 100 cm of the distant object. The power of the
(a) Red (b) Violet (a) Convex lens (b) Concave lens lens required to see far objects will be
(c) Yellow (d) Green [MP PMT 1993, 2003]
(c) Cylindrical lens (d) Toric lens
(a) + 0.5 D (b) + 1.0 D
146. A ray of monochromatic light suffers minimum deviation of 38 o 4. Lens used to remove long sightedness (hypermetropia) is
(c) + 2.0 D (d) – 1.0 D
or
while passing through a prism of refracting angle 60 o . Refractive 16. A man can see the object between 15 cm and 30 cm. He uses the
index of the prism material is [Pb. PET 2001] A person suffering from hypermetropia requires which type of lens to see the far objects. Then due to the lens used, the near point
spectacle lenses [MP PMT 1995]
will be at
(a) 1.5 (b) 1.3
(a) Concave lens (b) Plano-concave lens
(c) 0.8 (d) 2.4 10
(c) Convexo-concave lens (d) Convex lens (a) cm (b) 30 cm
3
147. A ray incident a 15 o on one refracting surface of a prism of angle 5. Substance on the choroid is
(a) Japan black (b) Nigrim pigment 100
60 o , suffers a deviation of 55 o . What is the angle of emergence [DCE 2002] (c) 15 cm (d) cm
(c) Carbon black (d) Platinum black 3
o o
(a) 95 (b) 45 6. Astigmatism (for a human eye) can be removed by using 17. The far point of a myopia eye is at 40 cm. For removing this defect,
[CPMT 1972; MP PET/PMT 1988; CBSE PMT 1990] the power of lens required will be [MP PMT 1987]
(c) 30 o (d) None of these
(a) Concave lens (b) Convex lens (a) 40 D (b) – 4 D
(c) Cylindrical lens (d) Prismatic lens (c) – 2.5 D (d) 0.25 D
7. Circular part in the centre of retina is called 18. A man suffering from myopia can read a book placed at 10 cm
[MP PET/PMT 1988] distance. For reading the book at a distance of 60 cm with relaxed
(a) Blind spot (b) Yellow spot vision, focal length of the lens required will be
(c) Red spot (d) None of the above [MP PMT 1989]
8. Image formed on the retina is (a) 45 cm (b) – 20 cm
 Ray Optics 1691 1692 Ray Optics

(c) – 12 cm (d) 30 cm (c) – 10 D (d) + 4.0 D 39. When objects at different distances are seen by the eye, which of the 48. A man cannot see clearly the objects beyond a distance of 20 cm
19. If the distance of the far point for a myopia patient is doubled, the 30. A person can see clearly only upto a distance of 25 cm. He wants to following remains constant [MP PMT 1999] from his eyes. To see distant objects clearly he must use which kind
focal length of the lens required to cure it will become read a [MP
bookPET 1989]at a distance of 50 cm. What kind of lens does
placed (a) The focal length of the eye lens of lenses and of what focal length
(a) Half he require for his spectacles and what must be its power [MP PMT 2000]
(b) The object distance from the eye lens
(b) Double (a) Concave, – 1.0 D (b) Convex, + 1.5 D (a) 100 cm convex (b) 100 cm concave
(c) The radii of curvature of the eye lens
(c) The same but a convex lens (c) Concave, – 2.0 D (d) Convex, + 2.0 D (c) 20 cm convex (d) 20 cm concave
(d) The image distance from the eye lens
(d) The same but a concave lens 31. The human eye has a lens which has a [MP PET 1994] 49. A person uses spectacles of power +2D. He is suffering from
(a) Soft portion at its centre 40. A person wears glasses of power – 2.0 D. The defect of the eye and
20. A presbyopic patient has near point as 30 cm and far point as 40 the far point of the person without the glasses will be [MP PMT 1999] [MP PET 2000]
cm. The dioptric power for the corrective lens for seeing distant (b) Hard surface (a) Short sightedness or myopia
(a) Nearsighted, 50 cm (b) Farsighted, 50 cm
objects is (c) Varying refractive index
(c) Nearsighted, 250 cm (d) Astigmatism, 50 cm (b) Long sightedness or hypermetropia
(a) 40 D (b) 4 D (d) Constant refractive index
41. An eye specialist prescribes spectacles having a combination of (c) Presbyopia
(c) – 2.5 D (d) 0.25 D 32. A man with defective eyes cannot see distinctly object at the convex lens of focal length 40 cm in contact with a concave lens of (d) Astigmatism
21. An imaginary line joining the optical centre of the eye lens and the distance more than 60 cm from his eyes. The power of the lens to focal length 25 cm. The power of this lens combination in diopters 50. To remove myopia (short sightedness) a lens of power 0.66 D is
yellow point is called as be used will be [MP PMT 1994]
is required. The distant point of the eye is approximately
(a) Principal axis (b) Vision axis (a) + 60 D (b) – 60 D [IIT 1997 Cancelled; DPMT 2000] [MP PMT 2001]
(c) Neutral axis (d) Optical axis
1 (a) + 1.5 (b) – 1.5 (a) 100 cm (b) 150 cm
22. The light when enters the human eye experiences most of the (c) – 1.66 D (d) D
1 . 66 (c) + 6.67 (d) – 6.67 (c) 50 cm (d) 25 cm
refraction while passing through
33. A person's near point is 50 cm and his far point is 3 m. Power of 42. Match the List I with the List II from the combinations shown 51. A person
[ISMsuffering
Dhanbad from
1994] 'presbyopia' (myopia and hyper metropia
(a) Cornea (b) Aqueous humour
the lenses he requires for both defects) should use [MP PET 2001]
(c) Vitrous humour (d) Crystalline lens (I) Presbiopia (A) Sphero-cylindrical lens
(i) reading and (a) A concave lens
23. The impact of an image on the retina remains for (II) Hypermetropia (B) Convex lens of proper
(ii) for seeing distant stars are [MP PMT 1994] power may be used close (b) A convex lens
(a) 0.1 sec (b) 0.5 sec to the eye
(a) – 2 D and 0.33 D (b) 2 D and – 0.33 D (c) A bifocal lens whose lower portion is convex
(c) 10 sec (d) 15 sec (III) Astigmatism (C) Concave lens of suitable
(c) – 2 D and 3 D (d) 2 D and – 3 D (d) A bifocal lens whose upper portion is convex
24. A person is suffering from myopic defect. He is able to see clear focal length
34. A person wears glasses of power – 2.5 D. The defect of the eye and 52. A person who can see things most clearly at a distance of 10 cm.
objects placed at 15 cm. What type and of what focal length of lens (IV) Myopia (D) Bifocal lens of suitable focal
the far point of the person without the glasses are respectively Requires spectacles to enable to him to see clearly things at a
he should use to see clearly the object placed 60 cm away [MP PMT 1991] length
(a) Farsightedness, 40 cm (b) Nearsightedness, 40 cm distance of 30 cm. What should be the focal length of the spectacles
(a) Concave lens of 20 cm focal length
[BHU 2003; CPMT 2004; PM PMT 2005]
(b) Convex lens of 20 cm focal length (c) Astigmatism, 40 cm (d) Nearsightedness, 250 cm (a) I-A; II-C; III-B; IV-D (b) I-B; II-D; III-C; IV-A
(a) 15 cm (Concave) (b) 15 cm (Convex)
(c) Concave lens of 12 cm focal length 35. Myopia is due to [AFMC 1996] (c) I-D; II-B; III-A; IV-C (d) I-D; II-A; III-C; IV-B (c) 10 cm (d) 0
(d) Convex lens of 12 cm focal length (a) Elongation of eye ball
43. Near and far points of a human eye are 53. Far points of myopic eye is 250 cm, then the focal length of the lens
25. The sensation of vision in the retina is carried to the brain by (b) Irregular change in focal length to be used will be [DPMT 2002]
(c) Shortening of eye ball [EAMCET (Med.) 1995; MP PET 2001; BCECE 2004]
(a) Ciliary muscles (b) Blind spot (a) – 250 cm (b) – 250/9 cm
(d) Older age (a) 0 and 25 cm (b) 0 and  (c) + 250 cm (d) + 250/9 cm
(c) Cylindrical lens (d) Optic nerve
36. A person is suffering from the defect astigmatism. Its main reason is 54. A man can see clearly up to 3 metres. Prescribe a lens for his
26. When the power of eye lens increases, the defect of vision is (c) 25 cm and 100 cm (d) 25 cm and 
(a) Distance of the eye lens from retina is increased spectacles so that he can see clearly up to 12 metres
produced. The defect is known as
(b) Distance of the eye lens from retina is decreased 44. Two parallel pillars are 11 km away from an observer. The minimum [DPMT 2002]
(a) Shortsightedness (b) Longsightedness distance between the pillars so that they can be seen separately will (a) – 3/4 D (b) 3 D
(c) The cornea is not spherical
(c) Colourblindness (d) None of the above be [RPET 1997; RPMT 2000]
(c) – 1/4 D (d) – 4 D
(d) Power of accommodation of the eye is decreased
27. A man is suffering from colour blindness for green colour. To (a) 3.2 m (b) 20.8 m 55. A satisfactory photographic print is obtained when the exposure
37. A person cannot see objects clearly beyond 2.0 m. The power of lens time is 10 sec at a distance of 2 m from a 60 cd lamp. The time of
remove this defect, he should use goggles of
required to correct his vision will be (c) 91.5 m (d) 183 m exposure required for the same quality print at a distance of 4 m
(a) Green colour glasses (b) Red colour glasses [MP PMT/PET 1998; JIPMER 2000; 45. Retina of eye acts like ........ of camera [AFMC 2003] from a 120 cd lamp is
(c) Smoky colour glasses (d) None of the above KCET 2000; Pb. PET 2001] (a) Shutter (b) Film [Kerala PMT 2002]
28. In human eye the focussing is done by [CPMT 1983] (a) + 2.0 D (b) – 1.0 D (c) Lens (d) None of these (a) 5 sec (b) 10 sec
(a) To and fro movement of eye lens (c) + 1.0 D (d) – 0.5 D 46. The hyper-metropia is a [CBSE PMT 2000] (c) 15 sec (d) 20 sec
(b) To and fro movement of the retina 38. The resolving limit of healthy eye is about (a) Short-side defect (b) Long- side defect 56. A person can not see the objects clearly placed at a distance more
than 40 cm. He is advised to use a lens of power
(c) Change in the convexity of the lens surface [MP PET 1999; RPMT 1999; AIIMS 2001] (c) Bad vision due to old age (d) None of these
[DCE 2002; MP PMT 2002, 03]
(d) Change in the refractive index of the eye fluids  47. Amount of light entering into the camera depends upon (a) – 2.5 D (b) + 2.5 D
 1 
(a) 1 or   (b) 1  [DCE 2000]
29. A short sighted person can see distinctly only those objects which lie  60  (c) – 6.25 D (d) + 1.5 D
(a) Focal length of the objective lens
between 10 cm and 100 cm from him. The power of the spectacle 57. A person uses a lens of power + 3D to normalise vision. Near point
lens required to see a distant object is 1 (b) Product of focal length and diameter of the objective lens
(c) 1 o (d) " of hypermetropic eye is [CPMT 2002]
[MP PET 1992] 60 (c) Distance of the object from camera
(a) 1 m (b) 1.66 m
(d) Aperture setting of the camera
(a) + 0.5 D (b) – 1.0 D (c) 2 m (d) 0.66 m
 Ray Optics 1693 1694 Ray Optics

58. A defective eye cannot see close objects clearly because their image (d) 4 correction for far-sightedness (a) 18 (b) 32 (a) The focal lengths of the objective and the eye piece should be
is formed [MP PET 2003] (c) 64 (d) 20 small
(a) On the eye lens Microscope and Telescope (b) Objective should have small focal length and the eye piece large
11. When the length of a microscope tube increases, its magnifying
(b) Between eye lens and retina 1. The focal lengths of the objective and eye-lens of a microscope are 1 power [MNR 1986] (c) Both should have large focal lengths
(c) On the retina cm and 5 cm respectively. If the magnifying power for the relaxed (a) Decreases (b) Increases (d) The objective should have large focal length and eye piece
(d) Beyond retina eye is 45, then the length of the tube is
(c) Does not change (d) May decrease or increase should have small
59. Image formed on retina of eye is proportional to (a) 30 cm (b) 25 cm 12. In a compound microscope, if the objective produces an image I and
o 22. If the focal length of the objective lens is increased then
[RPMT 2001] (c) 15 cm (d) 12 cm the eye piece produces an image I , then
e
[MP PMT 1994]
(a) Size of object (b) Area of object 2. In a compound microscope magnification will be large, if the focal [MP PET 1990]
(a) Magnifying power of microscope will increase but that of
Size of object size of image length of the eye piece is [CPMT 1984] (a) I is virtual but I is real
(c) (d) o e
telescope will decrease
Size of image size of object (a) Large (b) Smaller (b) I is real but I is virtual
o e
(b) Magnifying power of microscope and telescope both will
60. A student can distinctly see the object upto a distance 15 cm. He (c) Equal to that of objective (d) Less than that of objective (c) I and I are both real
o e increase
wants to see the black board at a distance of 3 m. Focal length and 3. The focal length of the objective lens of a compound microscope is [CPMT 1985 (d) I and I are both virtual
power of lens used respectively will be
o e
(c) Magnifying power of microscope and telescope both will
(a) Equal to the focal length of its eye piece 13. The magnifying power of a simple microscope can be increased, if decrease
[Pb. PMT 2003]
(b) Less than the focal length of eye piece we use eye-piece of [MP PMT 1986]
(a)  4.8 cm,  3.3 D (b)  5.8 cm,  4.3 D (d) Magnifying power of microscope will decrease but that of
(c) Greater than the focal length of eye piece (a) Higher focal length (b) Smaller focal length telescope will increase
(c)  7.5 cm,  6.3 D (d)  15.8 cm,  6.3 D (c) Higher diameter (d) Smaller diameter
(d) Any of the above three 23. The magnification produced by the objective lens and the eye lens of
61. A camera objective has an aperture diameter d. If the aperture is 14. An electron microscope is superior to an optical microscope in [CPMT 1984]
a compound microscope are 25 and 6 respectively. The magnifying
4. Microscope is an optical instrument which
reduced to diameter d / 2, the exposure time under identical (a) Having better resolving power power of this microscope is
(a) Enlarges the object
conditions of light should be made (b) Being easy to handle [Manipal MEE 1995; DPMT 2002]
[Kerala PMT 2004] (b) Increases the visual angle formed by the object at the eye
(c) Low cost (a) 19 (b) 31
(c) Decreases the visual angle formed by the object at the eye
(a) 2 fold (b) 2 fold (d) Quickness of observation
(d) Brings the object nearer (c) 150 (d) 150
(c) 2 2 fold (d) 4 fold 15. The magnifying power of a microscope with an objective of 5 mm
5. Magnifying power of a simple microscope is (when final image is focal length is 400. The length of its tube is 20 cm. Then the focal 24. The focal lengths of the objective and the eye-piece of a compound
62. The light gathering power of a camera lens depends on formed at D = 25 cm from eye) length of the eye-piece is [MP PMT 1991] microscope are 2.0 cm and 3.0 cm respectively. The distance
[DCE 2003]
[MP PET 1996; BVP 2003] (a) 200 cm (b) 160 cm between the objective and the eye-piece is 15.0 cm. The final image
(a) Its diameter only formed by the eye-piece is at infinity. The two lenses are thin. The
(b) Ratio of focal length and diameter D D (c) 2.5 cm (d) 0.1 cm
(a) (b) 1  distances in cm of the object and the image produced by the
(c) Product of focal length and diameter f f 16. The maximum magnification that can be obtained with a convex lens objective measured from the objective lens are respectively [IIT 1995]
(d) Wavelength of light used of focal length 2.5 cm is (the least distance of distinct vision is 25
f D cm) (a) 2.4 and 12.0 (b) 2.4 and 15.0
f 1 (c) 1  (d) 1  [MP PET 2003]
63. The exposure time of a camera lens at the setting is D f (a) 10 (b) 0.1 (c) 2.3 and 12.0 (d) 2.3 and 3.0
2 .8 200
6. If in compound microscope m and m be the linear magnification of (c) 62.5 (d) 11 25. Resolving power of a microscope depends upon
f 1 2

the objective lens and eye lens respectively, then magnifying power
second. The correct time of exposure at is 17. When the object is self-luminous, the resolving power of a [MP PET 1995]
5 .6 of the compound microscope will be microscope is given by the expression (a) The focal length and aperture of the eye lens
[DCE 2003] [CPMT 1985; KCET 1994]
(a) 0.4 sec (b) 0.02 sec 2  sin  sin (b) The focal lengths of the objective and the eye lens
(a) (b)
(c) 0.002 sec (d) 0.04 sec (a) m 1  m 2 (b) m1  m 2 1 .22   (c) The apertures of the objective and the eye lens
64. Ability of the eye to see objects at all distances is called (d) The wavelength of light illuminating the object
(c) (m 1  m 2 ) / 2 (d) m 1  m 2 2  cos  2
[AFMC 2005] (c) (d) 26. The objective lens of a compound microscope produces
(a) Binocular vision (b) Myopia 7. For which of the following colour, the magnifying power of a 1 .22  
magnification of 10. In order to get an overall magnification of 100
(c) Hypermetropia (d) Accommodation microscope will be maximum 18. The power of two convex lenses A and B are 8 diopters and 4 when image is formed at 25 cm from the eye, the focal length of the
65. [KCET 2005] (a) White colour (b) Red colour diopters respectively. If they are to be used as a simple microscope, eye lens should be
1. the magnification of (a) 4 cm (b) 10 cm
(c) Violet colour (d) Yellow colour
F
8. The length of the compound microscope is 14 cm. The magnifying (a) B will be greater than A 25
power for relaxed eye is 25. If the focal length of eye lens is 5 cm, (b) A will be greater than B (c) cm (d) 9 cm
9
2. then the object distance for objective lens will be (c) The information is incomplete 27. A person using a lens as a simple microscope sees an
(a) 1.8 cm (b) 1.5 cm (d) None of the above (a) Inverted virtual image
(c) 2.1 cm (d) 2.4 cm 19. Finger prints are observed by the use of
3. (b) Inverted real magnified image
9. If the focal length of objective and eye lens are 1.2 cm and 3 cm (a) Telescope (b) Microscope (c) Upright virtual image
respectively and the object is put 1.25 cm away from the objective
lens and the final image is formed at infinity. The magnifying power (c) Gallilean telescope (d) Concave lens (d) Upright real magnified image
4. of the microscope is 20. To produce magnified erect image of a far object, we will be 28. Least distance of distinct vision is 25 cm. Magnifying power of
(a) 150 (b) 200 required along with a convex lens, is [MNR 1983] simple microscope of focal length 5 cm is
(c) 250 (d) 400 (a) Another convex lens (b) Concave lens [EAMCET (Engg.) 1995; Pb. PMT 1999]
Identify the wrong description of the above figures
(a) 1 represents far-sightedness 10. The focal length of objective and eye lens of a microscope are 4 cm (c) A plane mirror (d) A concave mirror (a) 1 / 5 (b) 5
(b) 2 correction for short sightedness and 8 cm respectively. If the least distance of distinct vision is 24 cm 21. In order to increase the magnifying power of a compound (c) 1 / 6 (d) 6
(c) 3 represents far sightedness and object distance is 4.5 cm from the objective lens, then the 29. The objective of a compound microscope is essentially
microscope [JIPMER 1986; MP PMT 1997]
magnifying power of the microscope will be
 Ray Optics 1695 1696 Ray Optics

[SCRA 1998] 38. Two points separated by a distance of 0.1 mm can just be resolved 47. A simple telescope, consisting of an objective of focal length 60 cm [MH CET 2001]
(a) A concave lens of small focal length and small aperture in a microscope when a light of wavelength 6000 Å is used. If the and a single eye lens of focal length 5 cm is focussed on a distant (a) It is equal in both (b) It is more in telescope
(b) Convex lens of small focal length and large aperture light of wavelength 4800Å is used this limit of resolution becomes object is such a way that parallel rays comes out from the eye lens. (c) It is more in microscope (d) It may be more in any one
(a) 0.08 mm (b) 0.10 mm If the object subtends an angle 2 at the objective, the angular width
o

(c) Convex lens of large focal length and large aperture of the image 56. If the telescope is reversed i.e. seen from the objective side
(d) Convex lens of small focal length and small aperture (c) 0.12 mm (d) 0.06 mm (a) Object will appear very small
[CPMT 1979; NCERT 1980;
30. Resolving power of a microscope depends upon 39. A compound microscope has two lenses. The magnifying power of (b) Object will appear very large
MP PET 1992; JIPMER 1997; UPSEAT 2001]
[DCE 1999] one is 5 and the combined magnifying power is 100. The magnifying
(a) 10 (c) There will be no effect on the image formed by the telescope
power of the other lens is o
(b) 24 o

(a) Wavelength of light used, directly (d) Image will be slightly greater than the earlier one
[Kerala PMT 2002] (c) 50 o
(d) 1/6 o

(b) Wavelength of light used, inversely 57. The focal length of the objective of a terrestrial telescope is 80 cm
(a) 10 (b) 20 48. The diameter of the objective of the telescope is 0.1 metre and
(c) Frequency of light used and it is adjusted for parallel rays, then its magnifying power is 20.
(c) 50 (d) 25 wavelength of light is 6000 Å. Its resolving power would be
(d) Focal length of objective If the focal length of erecting lens is 20 cm, then full length of
approximately [MP PET 1997]
telescope will be
31. In a compound microscope cross-wires are fixed at the point 40. The angular magnification of a simple microscope can be increased
by increasing [Orissa JEE 2002] (a) 7.32  10 6 rad (b) 1.36  10 6 rad (a) 84 cm (b) 100 cm
[EAMCET (Engg.) 2000]
(a) Focal length of lens (b) Size of object (c) 7.32  10 5 rad (d) 1.36  10 5 rad (c) 124 cm (d) 164 cm
(a) Where the image is formed by the objective
(b) Where the image is formed by the eye-piece (c) Aperture of lens (d) Power of lens 49. A photograph of the moon was taken with telescope. Later on, it 58. An astronomical telescope has an angular magnification of
magnitude 5 for distant objects. The separation between the
(c) Where the focal point of the objective lies 41. Wavelength of light used in an optical instrument are 1  4000 Å was found that a housefly was sitting on the objective lens of the
telescope. In photograph objective and the eye piece is 36 cm and the final image is formed
(d) Where the focal point of the eye-piece lies and  2  5000 Å, then ratio of their respective resolving power at infinity. The focal length f of the objective and the focal length f
[NCERT 1970; MP PET 1999] o e

32. In a compound microscope, the focal lengths of two lenses are 1.5 (corresponding to 1 and  2 ) is of the eye piece are
(a) The image of housefly will be reduced
cm and 6.25 cm an object is placed at 2 cm form objective and the [IIT 1989; MP PET 1995; JIPMER 2000]
final image is formed at 25 cm from eye lens. The distance between [AIEEE 2002] (b) There is a reduction in the intensity of the image
(a) f = 45 cm and f = – 9 cm
the two lenses is (a) 16 : 25 (b) 9 : 1 (c) There is an increase in the intensity of the image o e

(b) f = 7.2 cm and f = 5 cm

[EAMCET (Med.) 2000] (d) The image of the housefly will be enlarged o e

(c) 4 : 5 (d) 5 : 4 (c) f = 50 cm and f = 10 cm

(a) 6.00 cm (b) 7.75 cm 50. For a telescope to have large resolving power the o e

42. The separation between two microscopic particles is measured P A (d) f = 30 cm and f = 6 cm
(c) 9.25 cm (d) 11.00 cm [CPMT 1980, 81, 85; MP PET 1994; o e

and PB by two different lights of wavelength 2000 Å and 3000 Å DCE 2001; AFMC 2005] 59. In an astronomical telescope, the focal lengths of two lenses are 180
33. The length of the tube of a microscope is 10 cm. The focal lengths of
the objective and eye lenses are 0.5 cm and 1.0 cm. The magnifying
cm and 6 cm respectively. In normal adjustment, the magnifying
respectively, then [AIEEE 2002] (a) Focal length of its objective should be large
power will be [MP PET 1990]
power of the microscope is about (b) Focal length of its eye piece should be large
(a) PA  PB (b) PA  PB (a) 1080 (b) 200
[MP PMT 2000] (c) Focal length of its eye piece should be small
(c) PA  3 / 2 PB (d) PA  PB (c) 30 (d) 186
(a) 5 (b) 23 (d) Aperture of its objective should be large
60. The magnifying power of an astronomical telescope for relaxed
(c) 166 (d) 500 43. The image formed by an objective of a compound microscope is 51. An observer looks at a tree of height 15 m with a telescope of vision is 16. On adjusting, the distance between the objective and eye
34. In a compound microscope, the intermediate image is magnifying power 10. To him, the tree appears lens is 34 cm. Then the focal length of objective and eye lens will be
(a) Virtual and enlarged (b) Virtual and diminished
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000; MP PET 2005] [CPMT 1975] respectively [MP PMT 1989]
(c) Real and diminished (d) Real and enlarged (a) 10 times taller (b) 15 times taller
(a) Virtual, erect and magnified (a) 17 cm, 17 cm (b) 20 cm, 14 cm
44. An achromatic telescope objective is to be made by combining the (c) 10 times nearer (d) 15 times nearer
(b) Real, erect and magnified lenses of flint and crown glasses. This proper choice is (c) 32 cm, 2 cm (d) 30 cm, 4 cm
52. The focal length of objective and eye lens of a astronomical telescope 61. In Gallilean telescope, if the powers of an objective and eye lens are
(c) Real, inverted and magnified (a) Convergent of crown and divergent of flint are respectively 2 m and 5 cm. Final image is formed at (i) least respectively +1.25 D and – 20 D, then for relaxed vision, the length
(d) Virtual, erect and reduced (b) Divergent of crown and convergent of flint distance of distinct vision (ii) infinity. The magnifying power in both and magnification will be
35. The magnifying power of a compound microscope increases when [MP PET 2000] cases will be [MP PMT/PET 1988]
(c) Both divergent (a) 21.25 cm and 16 (b) 75 cm and 20
(a) The focal length of objective lens is increased and that of eye (a) – 48, – 40 (b) – 40, – 48
(d) Both convergent (c) 75 cm and 16 (d) 8.5 cm and 21.25
lens is decreased (c) – 40, 48 (d) – 48, 40
45. If F and F are the focal length of the objective and eye-piece 62. The aperture of a telescope is made large, because
(b) The focal length of eye lens is increased and that of objective o e 53. For observing a cricket match, a binocular is preferred to a
respectively of a telescope, then its magnifying power will be [CPMT 1977, 82, 97, terrestrial telescope because [DPMT 1999]
lens is decreased
SCRA 1994; KCET 1999; Pb. PMT 2000; BHU 2001; (a) The binocular gives the proper three dimensional view (a) To increase the intensity of image
(c) Focal lengths of both objective and eye-piece are increased
DCE 2002; RPMT 2003; BCECE 2003, 04] (b) The binocular has shorter length (b) To decrease the intensity of image
(d) Focal lengths of both objective and eye-piece are decreased
(a) Fo  Fe (b) Fo  Fe (c) The telescope does not give erect image (c) To have greater magnification
36. If the red light is replaced by blue light illuminating the object in a
microscope the resolving power of the microscope [DCE 2001] (d) Telescope have chromatic aberrations (d) To have lesser resolution
1
(a) Decreases (b) Increases (c) Fo / Fe (d) (Fo  Fe ) 54. To increase the magnifying power of telescope (f = focal length of
o
63. In Gallilean telescope, the final image formed is
2 the objective and f = focal length of the eye lens)
(c) Gets halved (d) Remains unchanged
e (a) Real, erect and enlarged
46. The magnifying power of a telescope can be increased by [MP PET/PMT 1988; MP PMT 1992, 94] (b) Virtual, erect and enlarged
37. The magnifying power of a simple microscope is 6. The focal length (a) f should be large and f should be small
[CPMT 1979] (c) Real, inverted and enlarged
of its lens in metres will be, if least distance of distinct vision is
o e

(b) f should be small and f should be large

25 cm [MP PMT 2001] (a) Increasing focal length of the system o e
(d) Virtual, inverted and enlarged
(c) f and f both should be large
(a) 0.05 (b) 0.06 (b) Fitting eye piece of high power o e
64. The magnifying power of a telescope is 9. When it is adjusted for
(d) f and f both should be small parallel rays, the distance between the objective and the eye-piece is
(c) 0.25 (d) 0.12 (c) Fitting eye piece of low power o e

55. Relative difference of focal lengths of objective and eye lens in the found to be 20 cm. The focal length of the two lenses are
(d) Increasing the distance of objects microscope and telescope is given as (a) 18 cm, 2 cm (b) 11 cm, 9 cm
 Ray Optics 1697 1698 Ray Optics

(c) 10 cm, 10 cm (d) 15 cm, 5 cm (a) The total length of an astronomical telescope is the sum of the 83. The astronomical telescope consists of objective and eye-piece. The (a) 45 cm (b) 55 cm
65. The focal length of the objective and eye piece of a telescope are focal lengths of its two lenses focal length of the objective is
respectively 60 cm and 10 cm. The magnitude of the magnifying (b) The image formed by the astronomical telescope is always erect [AIIMS 1998; BHU 2000] 275 325
(c) cm (d) cm
power when the image is formed at infinity is [MP PETthe
because 1991]
effect of the combination of the two lenses is (a) Equal to that of the eye-piece 6 6
(a) 50 (b) 6 divergent 93. The focal lengths of the objective and eye-piece of a telescope are
(b) Greater than that of the eye-piece
(c) 70 (d) 5 (c) The magnification of an astronomical telescope can be increased respectively 100 cm and 2 cm. The moon subtends an angle of
(c) Shorter than that of the eye-piece
66. The magnifying power of an astronomical telescope is 8 and the by decreasing the focal length of the eye-piece 0 .5 o at the eye. If it is looked through the telescope, the angle
distance between the two lenses is 54 cm. The focal length of eye (d) The magnifying power of the refracting type of astronomical (d) Five times shorter than that of the eye-piece subtended by the moon's image will be
lens and objective lens will be respectively telescope is the ratio of the focal length of the objective to that 84. Four convergent lenses have focal lengths 100 cm, 10 cm, 4 cm and
[MP PMT 1991; CPMT 1991; Pb. PMT 2001] of the eye-piece 0.3 cm. For a telescope with maximum possible magnification, we (a) 100 o (b) 50 o
(a) 6 cm and 48 cm (b) 48 cm and 6 cm 76. A terrestrial telescope is made by introducing an erecting lens of choose the lenses of focal length (c) 25 o
(d) 10 o
(c) 8 cm and 64 cm (d) 64 cm and 8 cm focal length f between the objective and eye piece lenses of an [KCET 1994]
94. The diameter of the objective of a telescope is a, its magnifying
astronomical telescope. This causes the length of the telescope tube (a) 100 cm, 0.3 cm (b) 10 cm, 0.3 cm
67. An opera glass (Gallilean telescope) measures 9 cm from the power is m and wavelength of light is  . The resolving power of the
to increase by an amount equal to
objective to the eyepiece. The focal length of the objective is 15 cm. (c) 10 cm, 4 cm (d) 100 cm, 4 cm telescope is [MP PMT 2000]
Its magnifying power is [DPMT 1988] [KCEE 1996]
85. The focal length of objective and eye-piece of a telescope are 100 cm (a) (1.22 ) / a (b) (1.22 a) / 
(a) 2.5 (b) 2/5 (a) f (b) 2f and 5 cm respectively. Final image is formed at least distance of
(c) 5/3 (d) 0.4 (c) 3f (d) 4f distinct vision. The magnification of telescope is (c) [RPET 1997]
m /(1.22a) (d) a /(1.22 )
68. When a telescope is adjusted for parallel light, the distance of the 77. The length of an astronomical telescope for normal vision (relaxed (a) 20 (b) 24
objective from the eye piece is found to be 80 cm. The magnifying eye) (f = focal length of objective lens and f = focal length of eye
o e (c) 30 (d) 36 95. The sun's diameter is 1.4  10 9 m and its distance from the earth
power of the telescope is 19. The focal lengths of the lenses are lens) is 86. A planet is observed by an astronomical refracting telescope having is 10 11 m. The diameter of its image, formed by a convex lens of
[MP PMT 1992; Very similar to DPMT 2004] [EAMCET (Med.) 1995; CPMT 1999; BVP 2003] an objective of focal length 16 m and an eye-piece of focal length 2 focal length 2 m will be [MP PET 2000]
(a) 61 cm, 19 cm (b) 40 cm, 40 cm cm [IIT-JEE 1992; Roorkee 2000] (a) 0.7 cm (b) 1.4 cm
fo
(c) 76 cm, 4 cm (d) 50 cm, 30 cm (a) fo  fe (b)
fe (a) The distance between the objective and the eye-piece is 16.02 m (c) 2.8 cm (d) Zero (i.e. point image)
69. A reflecting telescope utilizes [CPMT 1983] 96. In a terrestrial telescope, the focal length of objective is 90 cm, of
(b) The angular magnification of the planet is 800
(a) A concave mirror (b) A convex mirror (c) fo  fe (d) fo  fe inverting lens is 5 cm and of eye lens is 6 cm. If the final image is at
(c) A prism (d) A plano-convex lens (c) The image of the planet is inverted
78. A Gallilean telescope has objective and eye-piece of focal lengths 200 30 cm, then the magnification will be
70. The aperture of the objective lens of a telescope is made large so as cm and 2 cm respectively. The magnifying power of the telescope (d) The objective is larger than the eye-piece [DPMT 2001]
to [AIEEE 2003; KCET 2003] for normal vision is 87. If tube length of astronomical telescope is 105 cm and magnifying (a) 21 (b) 12
(a) Increase the magnifying power of the telescope [MP PMT 1996] power is 20 for normal setting, calculate the focal length of objective (c) 18 [AFMC 1994] (d) 15
(b) Increase the resolving power of the telescope (a) 90 (b) 100 (a) 100 cm (b) 10 cm 97. The resolving power of a telescope depends on
(c) Make image aberration less (c) 108 (d) 198 (c) 20 cm (d) 25 cm [MP PET 2000, 01; DCE 2003]
(d) Focus on distant objects 79. In an astronomical telescope, the focal length of the objective lens is 88. The length of a telescope is 36 cm. The focal lengths of its lenses (a) Focal length of eye lens
71. On which of the following does the magnifying power of a telescope 100 cm and of eye-piece is 2 cm. The magnifying power of the can be [Bihar MEE 1995]
telescope for the normal eye is (b) Focal length of objective lens
depends [MP PET 1992]
(a) 30 cm, 6 cm (b) – 30 cm, – 6 cm
[MP PET 1997] (c) Length of the telescope
(a) The focal length of the objective only
(a) 50 (b) 10 (c) 30 cm, – 6 cm (d) – 30 cm, 6 cm (d) Diameter of the objective lens
(b) The diameter of aperture of the objective only
89. An astronomical telescope of ten-fold angular magnification has a 98. Four lenses of focal length + 15 cm, + 20cm, + 150cm and + 250
(c) The focal length of the objective and that of the eye piece 1
(c) 100 (d) length of 44 cm. The focal length of the objective is cm are available for making an astronomical telescope. To produce
(d) The diameter of aperture of the objective and that of the eye 50 the largest magnification, the focal length of the eye-piece should be
[CBSE PMT 1997]
piece 80. When diameter of the aperture of the objective of an astronomical [CPMT 2001; AIIMS 2001]
(a) 4 cm (b) 40 cm
72. Large aperture of telescope are used for telescope is increased, its [MP PMT 1997] (a) + 15 cm (b) + 20 cm
(c) 44 cm (d) 440 cm
[CPMT 1981; MP PMT 1995; AFMC 2000] (a) Magnifying power is increased and resolving power is (c) +150 cm (d) + 250 cm
(a) Large image (b) Greater resolution decreased 90. If both the object and image are at infinite distances form a
refracting telescope its magnifying power will be equal to 99. In an astronomical telescope, the focal length of objective lens and
(c) Reducing lens aberration (d) Ease of manufacture (b) Magnifying power and resolving power both are increased eye-piece are 150 cm and 6 cm respectively. In case when final image
[AMU (Engg.) 1999]
73. Two convex lenses of focal lengths 0.3 m and 0.05 m are used to (c) Magnifying power remains the same but resolving power is is formed at least distance of distinct vision. the magnifying power is
make a telescope. The distance kept between the two is increased
[MNR 1994]
(a) The sum of the focal lengths of the objective and the eyepiece [KCET 2001]
(d) Magnifying power and resolving power both are decreased (b) The difference of the focal lengths of the two lenses (a) 20 (b) 30
(a) 0.35 m (b) 0.25 m
81. The focal lengths of the objective and eye lenses of a telescope are (c) The ratio of the focal length of the objective and eyepiece (c) 60 (d) 15
(c) 0.175 m (d) 0.15 m respectively 200 cm and 5 cm. The maximum magnifying power of (d) The ratio of the focal length of the eyepiece and objective 100. In a laboratory four convex lenses L1 , L 2 , L3 and L 4 of focal
74. The diameter of the objective lens of a telescope is 5.0 m and the telescope will be
wavelength of light is 6000 Å. The limit of resolution of this 91. The number of lenses in a terrestrial telescope is lengths 2, 4, 6 and 8 cm respectively are available. Two of these
[MP PMT/PET 1998; JIPMER 2001, 02] lenses form a telescope of length 10 cm and magnifying power 4.
telescope will be [MP PMT 1994] [KCET 1999; MH CET 2003]
(a) – 40 (b) – 48 The objective and eye lenses are
(a) 0.03 sec (b) 3.03 sec (a) Two (b) Three
(c) – 60 (d) – 100 [MP PMT 2001]
(c) 0.06 sec (d) 0.15 sec (c) Four (d) Six
82. The minimum magnifying power of a telescope is M, If the focal (a) L 2 , L3 (b) L1 , L 4
75. All of the following statements are correct except 92. The focal lengths of the lenses of an astronomical telescope are 50
length of its eye lens is halved, the magnifying power will become cm and 5 cm. The length of the telescope when the image is formed (c) L3 , L 2 (d) L 4 , L1
[Manipal MEE 1995]
(a) M / 2 (b) 2 M at the least distance of distinct vision is
101. A telescope has an objective of focal length 50 cm and an eye piece
(c) 3 M (d) 4 M [EAMCET (Engg.) 2000] of focal length 5 cm. The least distance of distinct vision is 25 cm.
 Ray Optics 1699 1700 Ray Optics

The telescope is focussed for distinct vision on a scale 200 cm away. (c) Much greater than fo or fe (a) The increase in the resolving power by 2.54 times for the same (a) 100 : 1 (b) 10 : 1
4

The separation between the objective and the eye-piece is [Kerala PET 2002]  (c) 1 : 100 (d) 1 : 10 4

(a) 75 cm (b) 60 cm (d) Much less than fo or fe

(b) The increase in the limiting angle by 2.54 times for the same  7. A 60 watt bulb is hung over the center of a table 4 m  4 m at a
(c) 71 cm (d) 74 cm (e) Need not depend either value of focal lengths height of 3 m. The ratio of the intensities of illumination at a point
(c) Decrease in resolving power
102. The resolving power of a telescope whose lens has a diameter of 1.22 110. For a compound microscope, the focal lengths of object lens and eye on the centre of the edge and on the corner of the table is
m for a wavelength of 5000 Å is (d) No effect on the limiting angle
lens are fo and fe respectively, then magnification will be done by (a) (17 / 13)3 / 2 (b) 2 / 1
[Kerala PMT 2002] 119. A Galileo telescope has an objective of focal length 100 cm and
microscope when [RPMT 2001] magnifying power 50. The distance between the two lenses in (c) 17 / 13 (d) 5 / 4
(a) 2  10 5
(b) 2  10 6
normal adjustment will be [BCECE 2005]
(a) fo  fe (b) fo  fe 8. "Lux" is a unit of [Kerala PMT 2001]
(c) 2  10 2 (d) 2  10 4 (a) 98 cm (b) 100 cm (a) Luminous intensity of a source
103. To increase both the resolving power and magnifying power of a (c) fo  fe (d) None of these (c) 150 cm (d) 200 cm (b) Illuminance on a surface
telescope [Kerala PET 2002; KCET 2002]
111. The angular resolution of a 10 cm diameter telescope at a 120. A compound microscope has an eye piece of focal length 10 cm and (c) Transmission coefficient of a surface
(a) Both the focal length and aperture of the objective has to be wavelength of 5000 Å is of the order [CBSE PMT 2005] an objective of focal length 4 cm. Calculate the magnification, if an (d) Luminous efficiency of source of light
increased object is kept at a distance of 5 cm from the objective so that final
9. Total flux produced by a source of 1 cd is [CPMT 2001]
(b) The focal length of the objective has to be increased (a) 10 6 rad (b) 10 2 rad image is formed at the least distance vision (20 cm) [UP SEAT 2005]
(a) 12 (b) 11 1
(c) The aperture of the objective has to be increased (c) 10 4
rad (d) 10 rad 6 (a) (b) 8
4
(d) The wavelength of light has to be decreased (c) 10 (d) 13
112. The resolving power of an astronomical telescope is 0.2 seconds. If 1
104. A Galileo telescope has an objective of focal length 100cm and the central half portion of the objective lens is covered, the resolving (c) 4 (d)
Photometry 8
magnifying power 50. The distance between the two lenses in power will be [MP PMT 2004]
normal adjustment will be 10. If the luminous intensity of a 100 W unidirectional bulb is 100
(a) 0.1 sec (b) 0.2 sec candela, then total luminous flux emitted from the bulb is
[BHU 2002; Pb. PET 2002] 1. If luminous efficiency of a lamp is 2 lumen/watt and its luminous
(c) 1.0 sec (d) 0.6 sec intensity is 42 candela, then power of the lamp is (a) 861 lumen (b) 986 lumen
(a) 96 cm (b) 98 cm
113. An astronomical telescope has objective and eye-piece lens of powers [AFMC 1998] (c) 1256 lumen (d) 1561 lumen
(c) 102 cm (d) 104 cm
0.5 D and 20 D respectively, its magnifying power will be (a) 62 W (b) 76 W 11. The maximum illumination on a screen at a distance of 2 m from a
105. An astronomical telescope has a magnifying power 10. The focal lamp is 25 lux. The value of total luminous flux emitted by the lamp
(a) 2004]
length of eyepiece is 20 cm. The focal length of objective is [MP PMT 2002, 03; Pb. PET 8 (b) 20 (c) 138 W (d) 264 W
is [JIMPER 1997]
(a) 2 cm (b) 200 cm (c) 30 (d) 40 2. An electric bulb illuminates a plane surface. The intensity of (a) 1256 lumen (b) 1600 lumen
illumination on the surface at a point 2m away from the bulb is
1 1 114. Which of the following is not correct regarding the radio telescope (c) 100 candela (d) 400 lumen
(c) cm (d) cm 5  10 4 phot (lumen/cm ). The line joining the bulb to the point
2

2 200 makes an angle of 60 with the normal to the surface. The intensity 12. A small lamp is hung at a height of 8 feet above the centre of a
(a) It can not work at night o

of the bulb in candela is round table of diameter 16 feet. The ratio of intensities of
106. A telescope of diameter 2m uses light of wavelength 5000 Å for
(b) It can detect a very faint radio signal illumination at the centre and at points on the circumference of the
viewing stars. The minimum angular separation between two stars [IIT-JEE 1980; CPMT 1991] table will be [CPMT 1984, 1996]
whose image is just resolved by this telescope is (c) It can be operated even in cloudy weather
(a) 40 3 (b) 40 (a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 1
[MP PET 2003] (d) It is much cheaper than optical telescope
(a) 4  10 4 rad (b) 0.25  10 6 rad (c) 20 (d) 40  10 4 (c) 2 2 :1 (d) 3 : 2
115. The diameter of objective of a telescope is 1m. Its resolving limit for
the light of wave length 4538 Å, will be 3. In a movie hall, the distance between the projector and the screen is 13. Lux is equal to [CPMT 1993]
6 3
(c) 0.31  10 rad (d) 5.0  10 rad increased by 1% illumination on the screen is (a) 1 lumen/m 2
(b) 1 lumen/cm 2

107. A simple magnifying lens is used in such a way that an image is [Pb. PET 2003]
[CPMT 1990] (c) 1 candela/m 2
(d) 1 candela/cm 2

formed at 25 cm away from the eye. In order to have 10 times

(a) 5.54  10 7 rad (b) 2.54  10 4 rad (a) Increased by 1% (b) Decreased by 1% 14. Five lumen/watt is the luminous efficiency of a lamp and its
magnification, the focal length of the lens should be [MP PET 1990]
(c) Increased by 2% (d) Decreased by 2% luminous intensity is 35 candela. The power of the lamp is
(a) 5 cm (b) 2 cm (c) 6.54  10 7 rad (d) None of these
[CPMT 1992]
(c) 25 mm (d) 0.1 mm 4. Correct exposure for a photographic print is 10 seconds at a distance
116. A telescope has an objective lens of focal length 200 cm and an eye of one metre from a point source of 20 candela. For an equal (a) 80 W (b) 176 W
108. In a simple microscope, if the final image is located at infinity then piece with focal length 2 cm. If this telescope is used to see a 50 fogging of the print placed at a distance of 2 m from a 16 candela (c) 88 W (d) 36 W
its magnifying power is [MP PMT 2004] meter tall building at a distance of 2 km, what is the height of the source, the necessary time for exposure is
image of the building formed by the objective lens 15. A lamp rated at 100 cd hangs over the middle of a round table with
25 D (a) 100 sec (b) 25 sec diameter 3 m at a height of 2 m. It is replaced by a lamp of 25 cd
(a) (b) (a) 5 cm (b) 10 cm
f 26 (c) 50 sec (d) 75 sec and the distance to the table is changed so that the illumination at
(c) 1 cm (d) 2 cm the centre of the table remains as before. The illumination at edge of
f f 5. A bulb of 100 watt is hanging at a height of one meter above the the table becomes X times the original. Then X is [CP
(c) (d) centre of a circular table of diameter 4 m. If the intensity at a point
25 D 1 117. Magnification of a compound microscope is 30. Focal length of eye-
piece is 5 cm and the image is formed at a distance of distinct vision on its rim is I 0 , then the intensity at the centre of the table will be 1 16
(a) (b)
109. In a compound microscope the objective of fo and eyepiece of fe of 25 cm. The magnification of the objective lens is [CPMT 1996] 3 27
are placed at distance L such that L equals 1 1
(a) 6 (b) 5 (a) I0 (b) 2 5 I0
[Kerala PMT 2004]
(c) (d)
(c) 7.5 (d) 10 4 9
(a) fo  fe 118. At Kavalur in India, the astronomers using a telescope whose (c) 2I0 (d) 5 5 I0 16. The distance between a point source of light and a screen which is
objective had a diameter of one meter started using a telescope of 6. A movie projector forms an image 3.5m long of an object 35 mm. 60 cm is increased to 180 cm. The intensity on the screen as
(b) fo  fe diameter 2.54 m. This resulted in [KCET 2005] compared with the original intensity will be
Supposing there is negligible absorption of light by aperture then
illuminance on slide and screen will be in the ratio of [CPMT 1982] [CPMT 1888]
 Ray Optics 1701 1702 Ray Optics

(a) (1 / 9) times (b) (1 / 3) times 25. Two light sources with equal luminous intensity are lying at a 34. A screen receives 3 watt of radiant flux of wavelength 6000 Å. One
(c) 3 times (d) 9 times distance of 1.2 m from each other. Where should a screen be placed lumen is equivalent to 1.5  10 3 watt of monochromatic light of
between them such that illuminance on one of its faces is four times wavelength 5550 Å. If relative luminosity for 6000 Å is 0.685 while
17. A source of light emits a continuous stream of light energy which that on another face
falls on a given area. Luminous intensity is defined as that for 5550 Å is 1.00, then the luminous flux of the source is
[CPMT 1986] (a) 0.2 m (b) 0.4 m (a) 4  10 3 lm (b) 3  10 3 lm
(a) Luminous energy emitted by the source per second (c) 0.8 m (d) 1.6 m (c) 2  10 3 lm (d) 1.37  10 3 lm
(b) Luminous flux emitted by source per unit solid angle 26. Two lamps of luminous intensity of 8 Cd and 32 Cd respectively are 35. A point source of 3000 lumen is located at the centre of a cube of
(c) Luminous flux falling per unit area of a given surface lying at a distance of 1.2 m from each other. Where should a screen side length 2m. The flux through one side is
be placed between two lamps such that its two faces are equally (a) 500 lumen (b) 600 lumen
(d) Luminous flux coming per unit area of an illuminated surface
illuminated due to two sources
18. Venus looks brighter than other stars because [MNR 1985] (c) 750 lumen (d) 1500 lumen
(a) 10 cm from 8 Cd lamp (b) 10 cm from 32Cd lamp 36. Light from a point source falls on a small area placed perpendicular
(a) It has higher density than other stars
(c) 40 cm from 8 Cd lamp (d) 40 cm from 32 Cd lamp to the incident light. If the area is rotated about the incident light by
(b) It is closer to the earth than other stars an angle of 60 , by what fraction will the illuminance change
o

(c) It has no atmosphere 27. A lamp is hanging along the axis of a circular table of radius r. At (a) It will be doubled (b) It will be halved
what height should the lamp be placed above the table, so that the
(d) Atomic fission takes place on its surface (c) It will not change (d) It will become one-fourth
1
19. To prepare a print the time taken is 5 sec due to lamp of 60 watt at illuminance at the edge of the table is of that at its center
0.25 m distance. If the distance is increased to 40 cm then what is 8
the time taken to prepare the similar print
r r
[CPMT 1982] (a) (b)
2 2
(a) 3.1 sec (b) 1 sec
(c) 12.8 sec (d) 16 sec r r
(c) (d)
20. A lamp is hanging 1 m above the centre of a circular table of 3 3
diameter 1m. The ratio of illuminaces at the centre and the edge is 28. A point[NCERT
source 1982]
of 100 candela is held 5m above a sheet of blotting
3 paper which reflects 75% of light incident upon it. The illuminance
1  5 2 of blotting paper is
(a) (b)  
2 4 (a) 4 phot (b) 4 lux
4 4 (c) 3 phot (d) 3 lux
(c) (d) 29. A lamp is hanging at a height 40 cm from the centre of a table. If
3 5
its height is increased by 10 cm the illuminance on the table will
21. Two stars situated at distances of 1 and 10 light years respectively decrease by
from the earth appear to possess the same brightness. The ratio of (a) 10 % (b) 20%
their real brightness is
(c) 27% (d) 36%
[NCERT 1981] 30. Which has more luminous efficiency
(a) 1 : 10 (b) 10 : 1 (a) A 40 W bulb (b) A 40 W fluorescent tube
(c) 1 : 100 (d) 100 : 1 (c) Both have same (d) Cannot say
31. An electric lamp is fixed at the ceiling of a circular tunnel as shown
22. The intensity of direct sunlight on a surface normal to the rays is is figure. What is the ratio the intensities of light at base A and a
I0 . What is the intensity of direct sunlight on a surface, whose point B on the wall
normal makes an angle of 60 with the rays of the sun
o

(a) 1 : [CPMT
2 1981] S
Lamp

 3 (b) 2 : 3 Tunnel
(a) I0 (b) I0  
 2  B
  (c) 3 :1 O

I0 (d) 1 : 2
(c) (d) 2I0 A
2 32. When sunlight falls normally on earth, a luminous flux of

23. Inverse square law for illuminance is valid for [CPMT 1978] 1.57  10 5 lumen / m 2 is produced on earth. The distance of

(a) Isotropic point source (b) Cylindrical source earth from sun is 1.5  10 8 Km . The luminous intensity of sun in
candela will be
(c) Search light (d) All types of sources
(a) 3.53  10 27 (b) 3.53  10 25
24. 1% of light of a source with luminous intensity 50 candela is incident
on a circular surface of radius 10 cm. The average illuminance of (c) 3.53  10 29 (d) 3.53  10 21
surface is 33. In the above problem, the luminous flux emitted by sun will be
(a) 100 lux (b) 200 lux (a) 4.43  10 25 lm (b) 4.43  10 26 lm
(c) 300 lux (d) 400 lux (c) 4.43  10 27
lm (d) 4.43  10 28 lm
 1704 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1705

37. A point source of light moves in a straight line parallel to a plane (a) 28 cross mark is viewed directly from above. The position of the images (a) 16 cm above water level
table. Consider a small portion of the table directly below the line of 2 3m will be
(b) 30 (b) 9 cm above water level
movement of the source. The illuminance at this portion varies with B
[ISM Dhanbad 1994] (c) 24 cm below water level
its distance r from the source as (c) 32 0.2m
30 o
(a) (i) 0.04 m from the flat face; (ii) 0.025 m from the flat face (d) 9 cm below water level
1 1 (d) 34
(a) E (b) E A
(b) (i) At the same position of the cross mark; (ii) 0.025 m below 14. An air bubble in sphere having 4 cm diameter appears 1 cm from
r r2 3. A concave mirror of focal length 100cm is used to obtain the the flat face
surface nearest to eye when looked along diameter. If  = 1.5, the
1 1 image of the sun which subtends an angle of 30. The diameter of a g

(c) E (d) E  4 the image of the sun will be

(c) (i) 0.025 m from the flat face; (ii) 0.04 m from the flat face distance of bubble from refracting surface is
r3 r
(d) For both (i) and (ii) 0.025 m from the highest point of the [CPMT 2002]
38. Figure shows a glowing mercury tube. The illuminances at point A, (a) 1.74 cm (b) 0.87cm
hemisphere (a) 1.2 cm (b) 3.2 cm
B and C are related as 0.435cm
(c) (d) 100cm
10. One face of a rectangular glass plate 6 cm thick is silvered. An (c) 2.8 cm (d) 1.6 cm
(a) B > C > A
4. A square of side 3cm is placed at a distance of 25cm from a object held 8 cm in front of the first face, forms an image 12 cm
(b) A > C > B behind the silvered face. The refractive index of the glass is 15. An observer can see through a pin–hole the top end of a thin rod of
concave mirror of focal length 10cm. The centre of the square is at [CPMT 1999]
the axis of the mirror and the plane is normal to the axis. The area height h, placed as shown in the figure. The beaker height is 3h and
(c) B = C > A (a) 0.4 (b) 0.8
enclosed by the image of the square is its radius h. When the beaker is filled with a liquid up to a height
(d) B = C < A C A
B (c) 1.2 (d) 1.6 2h, he can see the lower end of the rod. Then the refractive index
2 2
39. The relative luminosity of wavelength 600 nm is 0.6. Find the (a) 4cm (b) 6cm of the liquid is
11. A rectangular glass slab ABCD, of refractive index n , is immersed in
radiant flux of 600 nm needed to produce the same brightness (c) 16cm 2 (d) 36cm 2
1

[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002]

sensation as produced by 120 W of radiant flux at 555 nm water of refractive index n (n >n ). A ray of light in incident at the
2 1 2

5. A short linear object of length l lies along the axis of a concave surface AB of the slab as shown. The maximum value of the angle of
(a) 50W (b) 72W
mirror of focal length f at a distance u from the pole of the mirror. incidence  , such that the ray comes out only from the other
max

(c) 120  (0.6)2 W (d) 200W The size of the image is approximately equal to [IIT-JEE 1988; BHU 2003; CPMT 200 surface CD is given by
1/2 2
40. Find the luminous intensity of the sun if it produces the same u f  u f  [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000]
illuminance on the earth as produced by a bulb of 10000 candela at (a) l  (b) l 
a distance 0.3 m. The distance between the sun and the earth is  f   f  3h
1.5  10 11 m 1/2 2 A D
 f   f  h
(c) l  (d) l 
(a) 25  10 22 cd (b) 25  10 18 cd u f  u f  max n1 n2
2h
(c) 25  10 26 cd (d) 25  10 36 cd 6. A thin rod of length f / 3 lies along the axis of a concave mirror of B C (a) 5/2 (b) (5 / 2)
41. A lamp is hanging at a height of 4m above a table. The lamp is focal length f . One end of its magnified image touches an end of
lowered by 1m. The percentage increase in illuminace will be (c) (3 / 2) (d) 3/2
the rod. The length of the image is n
(a) 40 % (b) 64%  n    1 
(a) sin1  1 cos sin1 2  (b) sin1 n1 cos sin1  16. A ray of light is incident at the glass–water interface at an angle i, it
n 2 
[MP PET 1995]
(c) 78% (d) 92%  n 2  n1    emerges finally parallel to the surface of water, then the value of
(a) f (b)
1
f  g would be [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003]
2 n  n 
(c) sin1  1  (d) sin1  2 
1  n2   n1  (a) (4/3) sin i Water r  w = 4/3
(c) 2f (d) f
4 12. A diverging beam of light from a point source S having divergence r
(b) 1/sin i
7. A ray of light falls on the surface of a spherical glass paper weight angle , falls symmetrically on a glass slab as shown. The angles of
making an angle  with the normal and is refracted in the medium incidence of the two extreme rays are equal. If the thickness of the (c) 4/3
1. A point source of light B is placed at a distance L in front of the Glass
centre of a mirror of width d hung vertically on a wall. A man walks at an angle  . The angle of deviation of the emergent ray from the glass slab is t and the refractive index n, then the divergence angle (d) 1
i
in front of the mirror along a line parallel to the mirror at a direction of the incident ray of the emergent beam is
distance 2L from it as shown. The greatest distance over which he
[NCERT 1982] 17. A glass prism ( = 1.5) is dipped in water ( = 4/3) as shown in
can see the image of the light source in the mirror is [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000] [IIT-JEE (Screening) 2000]
S figure. A light ray is incident normally on the surface AB. It reaches
(a) (   ) (b) 2(   ) (a) Zero the surface BC after totally reflected, if
(a) d/2 
(c) (   ) / 2 (d) (   ) (b)  [IIT JEE 1981; MP PMT 1997]
(b) d
d B 8. Light enters at an angle of incidence in a transparent rod of 1 i i (a) sin   8/9 B A
refractive index n. For what value of the refractive index of the (c) sin (1 / n) 
(c) 2d A
L
material of the rod the light once entered into it will not leave it (b) 2/3 < sin  < 8/9
(d) 3d 2L (d) 2 sin1 (1 / n) n t
through its lateral face whatsoever be the value of angle of incidence (c) sin   2/3
2. Two plane mirrors. A and B are aligned parallel to each other, as [CBSE PMT 1998] 13. A concave mirror is placed at the bottom of an empty tank with face
shown in the figure. A light ray is incident at an angle of 30 at a upwards and axis vertical. When sunlight falls normally on the mirror, (d) It is not possible C
point just inside one end of A. The plane of incidence coincides with (a) n 2 (b) n  1 it is focussed at distance of 32 cm from the mirror. If the tank filled 18. A convex lens A of focal length 20 cm and a concave lens B of focal
the plane of the figure. The maximum number of times the ray length 5 cm are kept along the same axis with the distance d
(c) n  1.1 (d) n  1.3  4
undergoes reflections (including the first one) before it emerges out with water     upto a height of 20 cm, then the sunlight will between them. If a parallel beam of light falling on A leaves B as a
is 9. A glass hemisphere of radius 0.04 m and R.I. of the material 1.6 is  3
parallel beam, then distance d in cm will be
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002] placed centrally over a cross mark on a paper (i) with the flat face; now get focussed at
(a) 25 (b) 15
(ii) with the curved face in contact with the paper. In each case the [UPSEAT 2002]
 1706 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1707

(c) 30 (d) 50 13 (a) 51 m (b) 60 m

(a) sin 
19. Diameter of a plano–convex lens is 6 cm and thickness at the centre 11 (c) 70 m (d) All the above
is 3 mm. If the speed of light in the material of the lens is 2  10 8
A
11 38. A small source of light is to be suspended directly above the centre of
m/sec, the focal length of the lens is (c) (d) (b) sin  
13 a circular table of radius R. What should be the height of the light
[CPMT 1989] R R R  source above the table so that the intensity of light is maximum at the
(a) 15 cm (b) 20 cm 3 edges of the table compared to any other height of the source
(c) sin 
(c) 30 cm (d) 10 cm 2 R R
26. The size of the image of an object, which is at infinity, as formed by (a) (b)
20. A point object O is placed on the principal axis of a convex lens of 2 2
a convex lens of focal length 30cm is 2 cm. If a concave lens of 1
(d) sin 
focal length 20 cm at a distance of 40 cm to the left of it. The focal length 20 cm is placed between the convex lens and the image 2 (c) R (d) 2R
diameter of the lens is 10 cm. If the eye is placed 60 cm to the right at a distance of 26 cm from the convex lens, calculate the new size
of the lens at a distance h below the principal axis, then the of the image 32. A spherical surface of radius of curvature R separates air (refractive 39. A light source is located at P1 as shown in the figure. All sides of
maximum value of h to see the image will be [MP PMT 1999] index 1.0) from glass (refractive index 1.5). The centre of curvature is the polygon are equal. The intensity of illumination at P2 is I0 .
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2003]
(b) 5 cm in the glass. A point object P placed in air is found to have a real
(a) 0 (a) 1.25 cm (b) 2.5 cm What will be the intensity of illumination at P3
image Q in the glass. The line PQ cuts the surface at a point O, and
(c) 2.5 cm (d) 10 cm (c) 1.05 cm (d) 2 cm PO = OQ. The distance PO is equal to 3 DPMT
[IIT JEE 1998; 3 2000]
(a) I0
21. A luminous object is placed at a distance of 30 cm from the convex 8 P1
o
lens of focal length 20 cm. On the other side of the lens, at what 27. An achromatic prism is made by crown glass prism ( Ac  19 ) (a) 5 R (b) 3 R
I0
distance from the lens a convex mirror of radius of curvature 10 cm (b)
and flint glass prism ( AF  6 o ) . If C v  1.5 and F
v  1.66 , (c) 2 R (d) 1.5 R 8
be placed in order to have an upright image of the object coincident
then resultant deviation for red coloured ray will be 33. A plano-convex lens when silvered in the plane side behaves like a 3
with it (c) I0
(a) 1.04° (b) 5° concave mirror of focal length 30cm. However, when silvered on the 8
[CBSE PMT 1998; JIPMER 2001, 02]
(c) 0.96° (d) 13.5° convex side it behaves like a concave mirror of focal length 10 cm. 3 P2 P3
(a) 12 cm (b) 30 cm Then the refractive index of its material will be I0 1995]
(d)1997; UPSEAT
[BHU
28. The refracting angle of prism is A and refractive index of material of 8
(c) 50 cm (d) 60 cm
A (a) 3.0 (b) 2.0 40. A container is filled with water ( = 1.33) upto a height of 33.25 cm.
22. Shown in the figure here is a convergent lens placed inside a cell prism is cot . The angle of minimum deviation is
2 A concave mirror is placed 15 cm above the water level and the
filled with a liquid. The lens has focal length + 20 cm when in air (c) 2.5 (d) 1.5
image of an object placed at the bottom is formed 25 cm below the
and its material has refractive index 1.50. If the liquid has refractive (a) 180°– 3A (b) 180° + 2A water level. The focal length of the mirror is [I
34. A ray of light travels from an optically denser to rarer medium. The
index 1.60, the focal length of the system is [NSEP 1994; DPMT 2000] (c) 90° –A (d) 180° – 2A critical angle for the two media is C. The maximum possible
(a) + 80 cm Liquid 29. An isosceles prism of angle 120° has a refractive index of 1.44. Two deviation of the ray will be
parallel monochromatic rays enter the prism parallel to each other (a) 10
[KCET (Engg./Med.) 2002]
(b) – 80 cm in air as shown. The rays emerging from the opposite faces
(b) 15
(c) – 24 cm   15 cm
Lens (a)   C (b) 2C (c) 20
2 
(d) –100 cm (d) 25 25 cm
(c)   2C (d)   C 33.25 cm =1.33
23. A hollow double concave lens is made of very thin transparent 41. A point object is moving on the principal axis of a concave mirror of
material. It can be filled with air or either of two liquids L and L 120° 35. An astronaut is looking down on earth's surface from a space
1 2
focal length 24 cm towards the mirror. When it is at a distance of
having refractive indices n and n respectively (n >n >1). The lens will
1 2 2 1 shuttle at an altitude of 400 km . Assuming that the astronaut's 60cm from the mirror, its velocity is 9 cm / sec. What is the
diverge a parallel beam of light if it is filled with [IIT-JEE
(a) (Screening) 2000]
Are parallel to each other velocity of the image at that instant
pupil diameter is 5 mm and the wavelength of visible light is
(a) Air and placed in air (b) Are diverging [MP PMT 1997]
500 nm. The astronaut will be able to resolve linear object of the
(b) Air and immersed in L (c) Make an angle 2 sin1 (0.72) with each other (a) 5 cm / sec towards the mirror
1

size of about [AIIMS 2003]

(c) L and immersed in L
(b) 4 cm / sec towards the mirror
(d) Make an angle 2 {sin1 (0.72)  30 o } with each other
1 2

(a) 0.5 m (b) 5 m

(d) L and immersed in L
(c) 4 cm / sec away from the mirror
2 1

24. The object distance u, the image distance v and the magnification m 30. A ray of light is incident on the hypotenuse of a right-angled prism (c) 50 m (d) 500 m
in a lens follow certain linear relations. These are after travelling parallel to the base inside the prism. If  is the
[Roorkee 2000] (d) 9cm / sec away from the mirror
refractive index of the material of the prism, the maximum value of 36. The average distance between the earth and moon is
42. A concave mirror is placed on a horizontal table with its axis
1 1 the base angle for which light is totally reflected from the 38.6  10 4 km. The minimum separation between the two points
(a) versus (b) m versus u directed vertically upwards. Let O be the pole of the mirror and C
u v hypotenuse is [EAMCET 2003] on the surface of the moon that can be resolved by a telescope
its centre of curvature. A point object is placed at C. It has a real
(c) u versus v (d) m versus v 1 1 whose objective lens has a diameter of 5 m with   6000 Å is [MP PMT 1993]
(a) sin1   (b) tan 1   image, also located at C. If the mirror is now filled with water, the
25. Which one of the following spherical lenses does not exhibit   image will be [IIT-JEE 1998]
dispersion? The radii of curvature of the surfaces of the lenses are (a) 5.65 m (b) 28.25 m
as given in the diagrams   1 1 (a) Real, and will remain at C
(c) sin1   (d) cos 1   (c) 11.30 m (d) 56.51 m
[IIT-JEE (Screening) 2002]     (b) Real, and located at a point between C and 
37. The distance of the moon from earth is 3.8  10 5 km . The eye is (c) Virtual and located at a point between C and O
31. The refractive index of the material of the prism and liquid are 1.56 most sensitive to light of wavelength 5500 Å. The separation of two
and 1.32 respectively. What will be the value of  for the following points on the moon that can be resolved by a 500 cm telescope will (d) Real, and located at a point between C and O
(a) R1 R2 (b) R  refraction [BHU 2003; CPMT 2004]
be [AMU (Med.) 2002]

R1  R2
 1708 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1709

43. The diameter of moon is 3.5  10 3 km and its distance from the nR nR  4 (a) 1 : 2 (b) 3 : 1
(c) (d) 55. Consider the situation shown in figure. Water  w   is filled
earth is 3.8  10 5 km. If it is seen through a telescope whose focal 2 4  3 (c) 1 : 3 (d) 2 : 1
length for objective and eye lens are 4 m and 10 cm respectively, 50. A room (cubical) is made of mirrors. An insect is moving along the in a breaker upto a height of 10 cm. A plane mirror fixed at a height 61. The image of point P when viewed from top of the slabs will be
then the angle subtended by the moon on the eye will be of 5 cm from the surface of water. Distance of image from the
diagonal on the floor such that the velocity of image of insect on (a) 2.0 cm above P
mirror after reflection from it of an object O at the bottom of the
approximately two adjacent wall mirrors is 10 cms . The velocity of image of insect
–1

beaker is
(b) 1.5 cm above P 1.5 cm
[NCERT 1982; CPMT 1991] in ceiling mirror is =1.5
(a) 15 cm
(a) 10 cms (b) 20 cms 5 cm (c) 2.0 cm below P 1.5 cm
(a) 15 o
(b) 20 o
–1 –1
1.5 cm
(b) 12.5 cm (d) 1 cm above P
(c) 30 (d) 35 =1.5
o o
10
(c) cms –1
(d) 10 2 cms –1

(c) 7.5 cm 10 cm 62. A fish rising vertically up towards the surface of water2 cm
with speed 3
44. The focal length of an objective of a telescope is 3 metre and 2 10 O' P
cm ms observes a bird diving vertically down towards it with speed 9
–1

diameter 15 cm. Assuming for a normal eye, the diameter of the (d) 10 cm 4
51. Figure shows a cubical room ABCD with the wall CD as a plane O ms . The actual velocity of bird is
–1

pupil is 3 mm for its complete use, the focal length of eye piece 56. A person runs with a speed u towards a bicycle moving away from
mirror. Each side of the room is 3m. We place a camera at the
must be [MP PET 1989] him with speed v. The person approaches his image in the mirror (a) 4.5 ms –1

midpoint of the wall AB. At what distance should the camera be

(a) 6 cm (b) 6.3 cm fixed at the rear of bicycle with a speed of
focussed to photograph an object placed at A (b) 5. ms –1

(a) u – v (b) u – 2v y
(c) 20 cm (d) 60 cm (a) 1.5 m (c) 3.0 ms –1

(c) 2u – v (d) 2(u – v)

45. We wish to see inside an atom. Assuming the atom to have a A B y'
(b) 3 m 57. Two transparent slabs have the same thickness as shown. One is (d) 3.4 ms –1

diameter of 100 pm, this means that one must be able to resolved a
width of say 10 p.m. If an electron microscope is used, the minimum (c) 6 m made of material A of refractive index 1.5. The other is made of two 63. A beaker containing liquid is placed on a table, underneath a
3m
electron energy required is about materials B and C with thickness in the ratio 1 : 2. The refractive microscope which can be moved along a vertical scale. The
(d) More than 6 m index of C is 1.6. If a monochromatic parallel beam passing through
[AIIMS 2004] microscope is focussed, through the liquid onto a mark on the table
D C the slabs has the same number of waves inside both, the refractive when the reading on the scale is a. It is next focussed on the upper
52. If an object moves towards a plane mirror with a speed v at an
(a) 1.5 KeV (b) 15 KeV index of B is surface of the liquid and the reading is b. More liquid is added and
angle  to the perpendicular to the plane of the mirror, find the
(c) 150 KeV (d) 1.5 KeV relative velocity between the object and the image the observations are repeated, the corresponding readings are c and
t t/3 2t/3
d. The refractive index of the liquid is
46. A telescope has an objective lens of 10 cm diameter and is situated y
(a) v O I d b b d
at a distance of one kilometre from two objects. The minimum
  A (a) (b)
distance between these two objects, which can be resolved by the (b) 2v B C d c b a d c b a
 
telescope, when the mean wavelength of light is 5000 Å, is of the vO vI
order of [CBSE PMT 2004] (c) 2v cos  x d c b a d b
(c) (d)
(d) 2v sin (a) 1.1 (b) 1.2 d b ab cd
(a) 0.5 m (b) 5 m
(c) 1.3 (d) 1.4 64. Two point light sources are 24 cm apart. Where should a convex
(c) 5 mm (d) 5 cm 53. A plane mirror is placed at the bottom of the tank containing a
liquid of refractive index  . P is a small object at a height h above 58. An object is placed infront of a convex mirror at a distance of 50 lens of focal length 9 cm be put in between them from one source
47. Two point white dots are 1mm apart on a black paper. They are the mirror. An observer O-vertically above P outside the liquid see P cm. A plane mirror is introduced covering the lower half of the so that the images of both the sources are formed at the same place
viewed by eye of pupil diameter 3 mm. Approximately, what is the and its image in the mirror. The apparent distance between these convex mirror. If the distance between the object and plane mirror
(a) 6 cm (b) 9 cm
maximum distance at which dots can be resolved by the eye ? [Take is 30 cm, it is found that there is no parallax between the images
two will be
wavelength of light = 500 nm] formed by two mirrors. Radius of curvature of mirror will be (c) 12 cm (d) 15 cm
(a) 2 h
[AIEEE 2005] (a) 12.5 cm (b) 25 cm 65. There is an equiconvex glass lens with radius of each face as R and
2h O
a  g  3 / 2 and a  w  4 / 3 . If there is water in object space
(a) 6 m 50
(b) (c) cm (d) 18 cm
(b) 3 m  3 and air in image space, then the focal length is
x
(c) 5 m  2h P 59. A cube of side 2 m is placed in front of a concave mirror focal (a) 2R (b) R
(c) h
(d) 1 m d  1 length 1m with its face P at a distance of 3 m and face Q at a
distance of 5 m from the mirror. The distance between the images (c) 3 R/2 (d) R2
48. A convex lens of focal length 30 cm and a concave lens of 10 cm  1 of face P and Q and height of images of P and Q are
focal length are placed so as to have the same axis. If a parallel beam (d) h  1   66. A prism having an apex angle 4 and refraction index 1.5 is located in
o

  (a) 1 m, 0.5 m, 0.25 m front of a vertical plane mirror as shown in figure. Through what
of light falling on convex lens leaves concave lens as a parallel beam,
then the distance between two lenses will be 54. One side of a glass slab is silvered as shown. A ray of light is 2m total angle is the ray deviated after reflection from the mirror
(b) 0.5 m, 1 m, 0.25 m
P
(a) 40 cm (b) 30 cm incident on the other side at angle of incidence i  45 o . Refractive (a) 176 o

index of glass is given as 1.5. The deviation of the ray of light from (c) 0.5 m, 0.25 m, 1m 2m
(c) 20 cm (d) 10 cm its initial path when it comes out of the slab is Q 3m (b) 4 o

(d) 0.25 m, 1m, 0.5 m

(a) 90 4°
(c) 178 90°
o

49. A small plane mirror placed at the centre of a spherical screen of o

60. A small piece of wire bent into an L shape with upright and
radius R. A beam of light is falling on the mirror. If the mirror (b) 180 o

45o horizontal portions of equal lengths, is placed with the horizontal (d) 2 o

makes n revolution. per second, the speed of light on the screen (c) 120 portion along the axis of the concave mirror whose radius of
o

after reflection from the mirror will be

(d) 45 o
 = 1.5 curvature is 10 cm. If the bend is 20 cm from the pole of the mirror, 67. An optical fibre consists of core of  surrounded by a cladding of 
1 2

(a) 4nR (b) 2nR then the ratio of the lengths of the images of the upright and < . A beam of light enters from air at an angle  with axis of fibre.
1

horizontal portions of the wire is The highest  for which ray can be travelled through fibre is
 1710 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1711

72. A compound microscope is used to enlarge an object kept at a drained out at a constant rate. The amount of water drained in c.c.
(a) cos1  22  12 distance 0.03m from it’s objective which consists of several convex per minute is (n = refractive index of air, n = refractive index of
1 2

lenses in contact and has focal length 0.02m. If a lens of focal length water) [AIIMS 2005]
2
(b) sin1 12   22 0.1m is removed from the objective, then by what distance the eye-
(a) x  R n /n
2
(b) x  R n /n
2

1 piece of the microscope must be moved to refocus the image 1 2 2 1


(c) tan 1
12  22 (a) 2.5 cm (b) 6 cm (c) 2  R n/n 1 2
(d)  R x
2

(c) 15 cm (d) 9 cm
(d) sec 1 12   22
73. If the focal length of the objective lens and the eye lens are 4 mm
68. A rod of glass ( = 1.5) and of square cross section is bent into the and 25 mm respectively in a compound microscope. The length of
shape shown in the figure. A parallel beam of light falls on the plane the tube is 16 cm. Find its magnifying power for relaxed eye
flat surface A as shown in the figure. If d is the width of a side and position
d (a) 32.75 (b) 327.5
R is the radius of circular arc then for what maximum value of
R
(c) 0.3275 (d) None of the above
light entering the glass slab through surface A emerges from the
glass through B 74. Three right angled prisms of refractive indices n1 , n2 and n 3 are
fixed together using an optical glue as shown in figure. If a ray
B passes through the prisms without suffering any deviation, then
(a) 1.5
(b) 0.5 n2
d
(c) 1.3 n1 n3
A
(d) None of these R
69. The slab of a material of refractive index 2 shown in figure has (a) n1  n2  n3 (b) n1  n2  n3
curved surface APB of radius of curvature 10 cm and a plane surface
CD. On the left of APB is air and on the right of CD is water with (c) 1  n1  n2  n3 (d) 1  n22  n12  n32
refractive indices as given in figure. An object O is placed at a 75. In a compound microscope, the focal length of the objective and the
distance of 15 cm from pole P as shown. The distance of the final eye lens are 2.5 cm and 5 cm respectively. An object is placed at
image of O from P, as viewed from the left is 3.75 cm before the objective and image is formed at the least
distance of distinct vision, then the distance between two lenses will
be (i.e. length of the microscopic tube)
(a) 20 cm
A C (a) 11.67 cm (b) 12.67 cm
(b) 30 cm
P C' O 4 (c) 13.00 cm (d) 12.00 cm
(c) 40 cm  
w 3 76. In a grease spot photometer light from a lamp with dirty chimney is
(d) 50 cm  s= 2.0
exactly balanced by a point source distance 10 cm from the grease
70. A double convex lens, lens made B of a material D of refractive index spot. On clearing the chimney, the point source is moved 2 cm to
15 cm
obtain balance again. The percentage of light absorbed by dirty
 1 , is placed inside two liquids or 20 cm
refractive indices  2 and  3 ,
chimney is nearly
as shown.  2  1   3 . A wide, parallel beam of light is incident (a) 56% (b) 44%
on the lens from the left. The lens will give rise to (c) 36% (d) 64%
(a) A single convergent 77. The separation between the screen and a plane mirror is 2 r. An
beam isotropic point source of light is placed exactly midway between the
2 2
(b) Two different 1 mirror and the screen. Assume that mirror reflects 100% of incident
convergent beams light. Then the ratio of illuminances on the screen with and without
the mirror is
(c) Two different 3 3
(a) 10 : 1 (b) 2 : 1
divergent beams
(c) 10 : 9 (d) 9 : 1
(d) A convergent and a divergent beam
78. The separation between the screen and a concave mirror is 2r. An
71. The distance between a convex lens and a plane mirror is 10 cm. The isotropic point source of light is placed exactly midway between the
parallel rays incident on the convex lens after reflection from the mirror and the point source. Mirror has a radius of curvature r and
mirror form image at the optical centre of the lens. Focal length of reflects 100% of the incident light. Then the ratio of illuminances on
lens will be the screen with and without the mirror is
(a) 10 cm (a) 10 : 1 (b) 2 : 1
(b) 20 cm (c) 10 : 9 (d) 9 : 1
(c) 30 cm O 79. The apparent depth of water in cylindrical water tank of diameter
(d) Cannot be determined 2R cm is reducing at the rate of x cm/minute when water is being
 1712 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1713

13. If x is the distance of an object from the focus of a concave mirror

and y is the distance of image from the focus, then which of the
following graphs is correct between x and y
(c) (d) (c) (d)
(a) y (b) y

1. In an experiment of find the focal length of a concave mirror a

graph is drawn between the magnitudes of u and v. The graph 5. The graph shows variation of v with change in u for a mirror. Points
looks like [AIIMS 2003] plotted above the point P on the curve are for values of v
(a) Smaller then f 10. For a convex lens, if real image is formed the graph between ( u + v) x x
v
v
(a) v (b) (b) Smaller then 2f and u or v is as follows (c) (d)
y y
(c) Larger then 2f P u+v u+v
(d) Larger than f (a) (b)
u u 6. The graph shows how the magnification 45° m produced by au convex
4f 4f
thin lens varies with image distance v. What was the focal length of x x
(c) v (d) v
the used [DPMT 1995] 14. For a small angled prism, angle of prism A, the angle of minimum
b 2f 2f deviation () varies with the refractive index of the prism as shown
u or v u or v
(a) in the graph
c  Q
2. u
As the position of an object (u) reflected from a concave umirror is m
(b)
b u+v u+v (a) Point P corresponds to  = 1
varied, the position of the image (v) also varies. By letting the u
ca (c) (d)
changes from 0 to  the graph between v versus u will be b (b) Slope of the line PQ = A/2
bc
(a) v (b) v (c) 4f
a (c) Slope = A O
a c P 
c v (d) None of the above statements is true
u (d)
u b 2f
u or v u or v
7. Which of the following graphs shows appropriate variation of 11. Which of the following graphs is the magnification of a real image 15. The graph between sine of angle of refraction (sin r) in medium 2
and sine of angle of incidence (sin i) in medium 1 indicates that
refractive index  with wavelength  against the distance from the focus of a concave mirror
3
(c) v (d) v (a) (b) y y (tan 36°  )
4
  (a) (b)
(a) Total internal reflection can take place
u u m m
(b) Total internal reflection sin r
  x x cannot take place
3. When light is incident on a medium at angle i and refracted into a (c) (d) Distance Distance
second medium at an angle r, the graph of sin i vs sinr is as shown (c) Any of (a) and (b)
in the graph. From this, one can conclude that   (d) Data is incomplete 2/10
y O
(c) y (d) sin i
sin r 16. A medium shows relation
between i and r as shown. If speed of light in the medium is nc then
1 m m value of n is
8.  if real image is formed the graph between
For a concave mirror, sin r
30o u (a) 1.5
sin i 1 x x
(a) Velocity of light in the second medium is 1.73 times the velocity and 1/v is of the form 1/v Distance Distance (b) 2
of light in the I medium v
12. A graph is plotted between angle of deviation () and angle of (c) 2 –1

30°
(b) Velocity of light in the I medium is 1.73 times the velocity in (a) (b) incidence (i) for a prism. The nearly correct graph is (d) 3 sin i
–1/2

the II medium y
y 17. For a concave mirror, if virtual image is formed, the graph between
(c) The critical angle for the two media is given by m and u is of the form
(a) (b) 
1/u 1/u 
1
sin ic 
1/v 1/v m
3 (a) (b) m
(c) (d) O x
1 O x i
(d) sin ic  i 1
2 y
y u f u
4. The graph between the lateral magnification (m) produced by a lens (c) (d)
and the distance of the image (v) is given by 
1/u 1/u (c) (d) m
[MP PMT 1994]  m
9. The graph between u and v for a convex mirror is
v v
(a) m (b) m f f f f O x 1
(a) (b) i O x
i u u
0 0 u u
v v

m m
v v
f f f f
0 0
v v
u u
 1714 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1715

18. A ray of light travels from a medium of refractive index  to air. Its Reason : Air bubble in water shines due to refraction of light Reason : Luminance of a surface refers to brightness of the 30. Assertion : By increasing the diameter of the objective of
angle of incidence in the medium is i, measured from the normal to [AIIMS 2002] surface. telescope, we can increase its range.
the boundary, and its angle of deviation is .  is plotted against i 5. Assertion : In a movie, ordinarily 24 frames are projected per 17. Assertion : When an object is placed between two plane Reason : The range of a telescope tells us how far away a
which of the following best represents the resulting curve second from one end to the other of the complete parallel mirrors, then all the images found are of star of some standard brightness can be spotted by
equal intensity. telescope.
film.
2 2 Reason : In case of plane parallel mirrors, only two images 31. Assertion : For the sensitivity of a camera, its aperture should
(a)  (b)  Reason : The image formed on retina of eye is sustained
are possible. be reduced.
1 1 upto 1/10 second after the removal of stimulus. [AIIMS 2001]
18. Assertion : The mirrors used in search lights are parabolic and Reason : Smaller the aperture, image focussing is also sharp.
6. Assertion : Blue colour of sky appears due to scattering of blue not concave spherical.
colour. 32. Assertion : If objective and eye lenses of a microscope are
O /2 O /2 Reason : In a concave spherical mirror the image formed is interchanged then it can work as telescope.
i i Reason : Blue colour has shortest wave length in visible always virtual.
(c) 2 (d)  2 Reason : The objective of telescope has small focal length.
spectrum. [AIIMS 2001] 19. Assertion : The size of the mirror affect the nature of the
 image. 33. Assertion : The illuminance of an image produced by a convex
1 1 7. Assertion : The refractive index of diamond is 6 and that of lens is greater in the middle and less towards the
Reason : Small mirrors always forms a virtual image.
edges.
liquid is 3 . If the light travels from diamond to 20. Assertion : Just before setting, the sun may appear to be
the liquid, it will totally reflected when the angle of elliptical. This happens due to refraction. Reason : The middle part of image is formed by undeflected
/2 i
O O /2 rays while outer part by inclined rays.
19. The distance v of the i
real image formed by a convex lens is incidence is 30 .o

Reason : Refraction of light ray through the atmosphere may

measured for various object distance u. A graph is plotted between v cause different magnification in mutually 34. Assertion : Although the surfaces of a goggle lens are curved, it
and u, which one of the following graphs is correct 1
: 
Reason[BVP 2003] , where  is the refractive index of perpendicular directions. does not have any power.
sin C
(a) (b) 21. Assertion : Critical angle of light passing from glass to air is Reason : In case of goggles, both the curved surfaces have
diamond with respect to liquid. [AIIMS 2000]
minimum for violet colour. equal radii of curvature.
v v
8. Assertion : The setting sun appears to be red. Reason : The wavelength of blue light is greater than the 35. Assertion : The resolving power of an electron microscope is
Reason : Scattering of light is directly proportional to the light of other colours. higher than that of an optical microscope.
wavelength. [AIIMS 2000]
22. Assertion : We cannot produce a real image by plane or convex Reason : The wavelength of electron is more than the
u u
9. Assertion : A double convex lens ( = 1.5) has focal length 10 cm. mirrors under any circumstances. wavelength of visible light.
When the lens is immersed in water ( = 4/3) its Reason : The focal length of a convex mirror is always taken 36. Assertion : If the angles of the base of the prism are equal,
(c) (d)
v v focal length becomes 40 cm. as positive. then in the position of minimum deviation, the
1 l  m  1 1  23. Assertion : A piece of red glass is heated till it glows in dark. refracted ray will pass parallel to the base of prism.
  
Reason :
f m R  R  [AIIMS 1999] The colour of glowing glass would be orange. Reason : In the case of minimum deviation, the angle of
 1 2 
20. For a convex lens the distance of the object is taken on X-axis and Reason : Red and orange is complementary colours. incidence is equal to the angle of emergence.
u
the distance of theu image is taken on Y-axis, the nature of the graph 10. Assertion : Different colours travel with different speed in
24. Assertion : Within a glass slab, a double convex air bubble is 37. Assertion : Dispersion of light occurs because velocity of light
so obtained is [BVP 2003]
vacuum.
formed. This air bubble behaves like a converging in a material depends upon its colour.
Reason : Wavelength of light depends on refractive index of lens.
(a) Straight line (b) Circle medium. [AIIMS 1998] Reason : The dispersive power depends only upon the
Reason : Refractive index of air is more than the refractive material of the prism, not upon the refracting angle
(c) Parabola (d) Hyperbola 11. Assertion : The colour of the green flower seen through red index of glass. of the prism.
glass appears to be dark.
25. Assertion : The images formed by total internal reflections are 38. Assertion : An empty test tube dipped into water in a beaker
Reason : Red glass transmits only red light. much brighter than those formed by mirrors or appears silver, when viewed from a suitable
[AIIMS 1997] lenses. direction.
12. Assertion : The focal length of the mirror is f and distance of Reason : There is no loss of intensity in total internal Reason : Due to refraction of light, the substance in water
the object from the focus is u, the magnification of reflection.
the mirror is f / u. appears silvery.
Read the assertion and reason carefully to mark the correct option out of
26. Assertion : The focal length of lens does not change when red
the options given below: 39. Assertion : Spherical aberration occur in lenses of larger
Size of image light is replaced by blue light.
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason is the correct Reason : Magnification  [AIIMS 1994] aperture.
Size of object Reason : The focal length of lens does not depends on colour
explanation of the assertion. Reason : The two rays, paraxial and marginal rays focus at
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct 13. Assertion : If a plane glass slab is placed on the letters of of light used.
different points.
explanation of the assertion. different colours all the letters appear to be raised 27. Assertion : There is no dispersion of light refracted through a
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false. up to the same height. rectangular glass slab. 40. Assertion : It is impossible to photograph a virtual image.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false. Reason : The rays which appear diverging from a virtual
(e) If assertion is false but reason is true. Reason : Different colours have different wavelengths. Reason : Dispersion of light is the phenomenon of splitting
of a beam of white light into its constituent colours. image fall on the camera and a real image is
14. Assertion : The fluorescent tube is considered better than an
1. Assertion : A red object appears dark in the yellow light 28. Assertion : All the materials always have the same colour, captured.
electric bulb.
Reason : A red colour is scattered less [AIIMS 2004] whether viewed by reflected light or through 41. Assertion : The speed of light in a rarer medium is greater
Reason : Efficiency of fluorescent tube is more than the
transmitted light. than that in a denser medium
2. Assertion : The stars twinkle while the planets do not. efficiency of electric bulb.
Reason : The colour of material does not depend on nature
15. Assertion : The polar caps of earth are cold in comparison to Reason : One light year equals to 9.5 × 10 km
12

Reason : The stars are much bigger in size than the planets.[AIIMS 2003] of light.
equatorial plane. [AIIMS 1999]
29. Assertion : A beam of white light gives a spectrum on passing
3. Assertion : Owls can move freely during night. Reason : The radiation absorbed by polar caps is less than through a hollow prism. 42. Assertion : The frequencies of incident, reflected and refracted
Reason : They have large number of rods on their retina.[AIIMS 2003] the radiation absorbed by equatorial plane.
Reason : Speed of light outside the prism is different from beam of monochromatic light incident from one
16. Assertion : The illumination of earth's surface from sun is more the speed of light inside the prism. medium to another are same
4. Assertion : The air bubble shines in water. at noon than in the morning.
 1716 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1717

Reason : The incident, reflected and refracted rays are 56 b 57 a 58 a 59 d 60 c 131 a 132 c 133 a 134 c 135 b
coplanar [EAMCET (Engg.) 2000] 1 d 2 a 3 b 4 a 5 d 61 b 62 b 63 d 64 d 65 d 136 c 137 a 138 d 139 c 140 b
43. Assertion : The refractive index of a prism depends only on the 6 a 7 c 8 d 9 c 10 a 66 a 67 d 68 c 69 c 70 b 141 a 142 a 143 b 144 b 145 a
kind of glass of which it is made of and the colour
of light 11 b 12 d 13 b 14 a 15 b 71 d 72 b 73 a 74 c 75 a 146 a 147 d 148 b 149 c 150 a

Reason : The refractive index of a prism depends upon the 16 a 17 c 18 c 19 d 20 a 76 c 77 a 78 b 79 b 80 d 151 c

refracting angle of the prism and the angle of 21 b 22 b 23 c 24 a 25 c 81 c 82 a 83 d 84 a 85 c
minimum deviation [AIIMS 2000]
26 a 27 b 28 d 29 a 30 c 86 c 87 b 88 a 89 a 90 b Human Eye and Lens Camera
44. Assertion : The resolving power of a telescope is more if the
31 c 32 c 33 b 34 b 35 b 91 b 92 d 93 c 94 a 95 c
diameter of the objective lens is more. 1 c 2 a 3 b 4 d 5 b
36 b 37 a 38 b 39 c 40 d 96 c 97 c 98 a 99 d 100 a
Reason : Objective lens of large diameter collects more light.[AIIMS 2005] 6 c 7 b 8 a 9 d 10 a
101 a 102 d 103 c 104 d 105 a
45. Assertion : By roughening the surface of a glass sheet its 41 a 42 d 43 c 44 c 45 a 11 c 12 c 13 a 14 b 15 d
transparency can be reduced. 106 c 107 b 108 a 109 d 110 b
46 a 47 c 48 a 49 c 50 c 16 b 17 c 18 c 19 b 20 c
Reason : Glass sheet with rough surface absorbs more light.[AIIMS 2005] 111 c 112 c 113 c 114 d 115 a
51 d 52 b 53 b 54 b 55 b 21 b 22 a 23 a 24 a 25 d
46. Assertion : Diamond glitters brilliantly. 116 c 117 a 118 d 119 c 120 b
56 a 57 d 58 b 59 c 60 b 26 a 27 d 28 c 29 b 30 c
121 c 122 d 123 a 124 b 125 d
Reason : Diamond does not absorb sunlight. 61 d 62 a 63 b 64 d 65 b 31 c 32 c 33 b 34 b 35 a
126 c 127 d 128 b 129 b 130 c
[AIIMS 2005] 36 c 37 d 38 a 39 d 40 a
66 a 67 b 68 b 69 a 70 d
131 b 132 b 133 b 134 d 135 b
47. Assertion : The cloud in sky generally appear to be whitish. 41 b 42 c 43 d 44 a 45 b
71 c 72 c 73 d 74 d 75 b
136 d 137 d 138 b 139 a 140 c
Reason : Diffraction due to cloud is efficient in equal 46 b 47 d 48 d 49 b 50 b
76 d 77 c 78 c 79 b 80 b 141 b 142 b 143 c 144 b 145 c
measure at all wavelengths. [AIIMS 2005]
51 c 52 a 53 a 54 c 55 d
81 a 82 a 83 b 84 b 85 c
Prism Theory & Dispersion of Light 56 a 57 a 58 d 59 a 60 d
86 b 87 d 88 d 89 b 90 d
61 d 62 a 63 b 64 d 65 a
1 b 2 b 3 b 4 c 5 c
Total Internal Reflection
6 a 7 a 8 d 9 d 10 d Microscope and Telescope
1 b 2 c 3 d 4 d 5 c 11 c 12 b 13 b 14 a 15 a
Plane Mirror 1 c 2 b 3 b 4 b 5 b
6 c 7 b 8 c 9 a 10 d 16 b 17 d 18 a 19 d 20 b
6 d 7 c 8 a 9 b 10 b
11 b 12 c 13 c 14 d 15 d 21 a 22 c 23 a 24 a 25 b
1 d 2 b 3 b 4 c,d 5 c 11 a 12 b 13 b 14 a 15 c
16 c 17 c 18 cd 19 c 20 d 26 c 27 c 28 b 29 a 30 a
6 c 7 d 8 b 9 b 10 c 31 c 32 b 33 a 34 c 35 d 16 d 17 a 18 b 19 b 20 b
21 a 22 c 23 b 24 c 25 a
36 a 37 b 38 a 39 d 40 b 21 a 22 d 23 c 24 a 25 d
11 b 12 d 13 a 14 c 15 c 26 c 27 c 28 a 29 d 30 d
41 b 42 b 43 a 44 c 45 a 26 c 27 c 28 d 29 d 30 b
16 b 17 c 18 b 19 c 20 a 31 a 32 c 33 a 34 c 35 a
46 c 47 b 48 a 49 c 50 c 31 a 32 d 33 d 34 c 35 d
21 c 22 b 23 c 24 b 25 b 36 d 37 b 38 b 39 c 40 a
51 c 52 a 53 d 54 d 55 a 36 b 37 a 38 a 39 b 40 d
41 c 42 b 43 b 44 d 45 B
26 b 27 c 28 c 29 c 30 c 41 d 42 b 43 d 44 a 45 c
56 c 57 a 58 a 59 a 60 c
46 a
31 b 32 a 33 b 34 c 61 c 62 b 63 d 64 d 65 a 46 b 47 b 48 d 49 b 50 d
66 b 67 c 68 c 69 b 70 c 51 c 52 a 53 a 54 a 55 b
Refraction at Curved Surface
Spherical Mirror 71 a 72 d 73 a 74 b 75 a 56 a 57 d 58 d 59 c 60 c
1 a 2 a 3 d 4 c 5 a 76 b 77 b 78 b 79 d 80 a 61 c 62 a 63 b 64 a 65 b
1 a 2 c 3 d 4 c 5 a
6 d 7 b 8 a 9 c 10 c 81 b 82 a 83 b 84 c 85 a 66 a 67 a 68 c 69 a 70 b
6 b 7 c 8 b 9 a 10 b 11 c 12 d 13 b 14 c 15 b 86 c 87 c 88 a 89 b 90 b 71 c 72 b 73 a 74 a 75 b
11 d 12 b 13 b 14 b 15 c 16 d 17 c 18 d 19 c 20 c 91 c 92 a 93 c 94 c 95 b 76 d 77 c 78 b 79 a 80 c
16 d 17 b 18 b 19 a 20 a 21 c 22 a 23 d 24 a 25 d 96 c 97 c 98 a 99 a 100 c 81 b 82 b 83 b 84 a 85 b
21 a 22 b 23 d 24 d 25 b 26 a 27 b 28 a 29 a 30 c 101 a 102 b 103 a 104 b 105 d 86 abcd 87 a 88 a 89 b 90 c
26 bc 27 c 28 b 29 a 30 b 31 c 32 d 33 d 34 c 35 b 106 b 107 b 108 a 109 b 110 a 91 b 92 d 93 c 94 d 95 c
31 d 32 c 33 a 34 d 35 d 36 b 37 c 38 d 39 b 40 d 111 a 112 d 113 a 114 b 115 a
96 c 97 d 98 a 99 b 100 d
36 b 37 d 38 d 39 d 40 a 41 a 42 c 43 a 44 c 45 d 116 d 117 d 118 d 119 c 120 d
101 c 102 b 103 a 104 b 105 b
41 d 42 d 43 a 44 a 46 d 47 c 48 b 49 a 50 b 121 a 122 d 123 c 124 d 125 b
106 c 107 c 108 a 109 c 110 c
51 c 52 a 53 a 54 b 55 a 126 a 127 c 128 c 129 d 130 a
111 d 112 a 113 d 114 a 115 a
Refraction of Light at Plane Surfaces
 1718 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1719

116 a 117 b 118 a 119 a 120 a 26 d 27 b 28 d 29 d 30 b 18. (b) Size of image formed by a plane mirror is same as that of the
object. Hence its magnification will be 1 .
31 c 32 d 33 a 34 a 35 c
19. (c)
Photometry 36 a 37 b 38 c 39 a 40 e Incident ray

41 b 42 b 43 c 44 a 45 c 30° 30° Reflected ray

1 d 2 b 3 d 4 c 5 d
46 b 47 c  360   360 
6 b 7 a 8 b 9 c 10 c 6. (c) Number of images    1    1  5 60°
11 a 12 c 13 c 14 c 15 a
    60 
30°
7. (d) F using distance of image = 4.5 m + 3 m = 7.5 m. hr .Surface
min .
16 a 17 b 18 b 19 c 20 b o

20. (a) Subtract the given time from 11 : 60

21 c 22 c 23 a 24 b 25 bc O I 21. (c) Relative velocity of image w.r.t. object
26 c 27 d 28 b 29 d 30 b  6  (6)  12 m / sec
3m 3m
31 d 32 a 33 d 34 d 35 a
Plane Mirror 4.5 m 6m/sec 6m/sec
36 c 37 c 38 d 39 d 40 c
8. (b) Several images will be formed but second image will be
41 c 1. (d)   (360  2 )  (360  2  60)  240o brightest O I
Incident light
2. (b) When converging beam incident on plane mirror, real image is 90% 100% 22. (b)
Critical Thinking Questions formed as shown First image 23. (c) See following ray diagram
90%
10%
10% Object Image
1 d 2 b 3 b 4 a 5 d
Plane mirror 10% 80 % Second brightest
6 b 7 b 8 a 9 b 10 c image
Real image O 10%
11 a 12 b 13 b 14 a 15 b 10cm 10cm
9% Third image
16 b 17 a 18 b 19 c 20 c I Virtual 9. (b) According to the following ray diagram length of mirror 30 cm
object 1 The distance focussed for eye  30  10  40 cm
21 c 22 d 23 d 24 ad 25 c  (10  170)  90 cm
2
26 b 27 d 28 d 29 d 30 d H 24. (b) Distance between object and image  0.5  0.5  1 m
10 cm
3. (b) Incident ray and finally reflected ray are parallel to each other Object Image
31 b 32 a 33 d 34 c 35 c
means   180 o E

180 cm
1m 180/2 cm
36 d 37 a 38 b 39 a 40 c
41 c 42 d 43 b 44 a 45 b 0.5m 0.5m
10. (c) The walls willF act as two mirrors inclined to each other at
46 c 47 c 48 c 49 a 50 d P Q
 360  25. (b) Relative velocity of image w.r.t. man
51 d 52 c 53 b 54 a 55 b 90 and so will form   1   4 – 1 i.e. 3 images of the
 90   15  (15)  30 m / s
56 d 57 c 58 b 59 d 60 b person. Now these images with person will act as objects for
61 d 62 a 63 a 64 a 65 c the ceiling mirror and so ceiling mirror will form 4 images Man Image
O
From   360  2  180  360  2    90 o further. Therefore total number of images formed
66 c 67 b 68 b 69 b 70 d 15m/s 15m/s
4. (c, d) By keeping the incident ray is fixed, if plane mirror rotates  3  3 1  7
71 b 72 d 73 b 74 d 75 a
through an angle  reflected ray rotates through an angle 2. Note : He can see. 6 images of himself. 26. (b)
76 c 77 c 78 b 79 b
h
11. (b) tan 45   h  60 m
60 Tower Real image
 O
Graphical Questions
 h I Virtual object
1 c 2 a 3 bc 4 c 5 c 

6 d 7 a 8 a 9 a 10 a 5. (c) Suppose at any instant, plane mirror lies at a distance x from 45o
object. Image will be formed behind the mirror at the same 45o 60 m
 360   360 
11 d 12 a 13 b 14 ac 15 b distance x. 27. (c) n  1  n    1  4
 
Image
16 d 17 b 18 a 19 d 20 d
  72 
 360   360 
O I 28. (c) n  1  3    1     90
Assertion and Reason 12. (d)   180  60  120      
x x
13. (a)  i  r  0 29. (c)
1 b 2 b 3 c 4 c 5 c 14. (c) When light is reflected from denser medium, a phase difference 360
When the mirror shifts towards the object by distance ‘y’ the 30. (c) n 1  7
of  always occurs. 45
6 a 7 e 8 c 9 a 10 e image shifts  x  y  (x  y)  2y
15. (c) Ray after reflection from three mutually perpendicular mirrors 31. (b) Diminished, erect image is formed by convex mirror.
11 a 12 a 13 e 14 a 15 c
So speed of image = 2  speed of mirror becomes anti-parallel. 32. (a) When a mirror is rotated by an angle , the reflected ray
16 b 17 d 18 c 19 d 20 a 16. (b) In two images man will see himself using left hand.
2 1 deviate from its original path by angle 2 .
y
21 c 22 e 23 d 24 d 25 a 17. (c) In plane mirror, size of the image is independent of the angle
of incidence.
O I2 I1

(x – y) (x – y)
x x
(x + y)
 1720 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1721

R f  1 (30) 33. (a) Mirror formula Refraction of Light at Plane Surfaces

33. (b) f , and R   for plane mirror. 13. (b) m       u   90 cm 1 1 1 1 1 1 20
2 ( f  u)  4  (30)  u      f cm. If object
34. (c) Let required angle be  f v u f  20 (10) 3 1. (d)
1
14. (b) Size is . It can’t be plane and concave mirror, because both moves towards the mirror by 0.1 cm then.
5 2. (a)  blue   red
 conditions are not satisfied in plane or concave mirror. Convex u  (10  0.1)  9.9 cm. Hence again from mirror formula
B
1
50° mirror can meet all the requirements. 1 1 1 3. (b)   , r  v
 15. (c) Plane mirror and convex mirror always forms erect images.    v  20.4 cm i.e. image shifts 
 20 / 3 v  9.9
 Image formed by concave mirror may be erect or inverted  air 6000
60° 40° (90°–) away from the mirror by 0.4 cm.
A depending on position of object. 4. (a) medium    4000 Å
From geometry of figure C D 34. (d) Image formed by convex mirror is always. Erect diminished and  1.5
16. (d) Virtual image is seen on the photograph.
virtual.
In  ABC;  = 180° – (60° + 40°) = 80° v 1 1 1 u u 5. (d) Velocity and wavelength change but frequency remains same.
17. (b)  m   also      1 R
  = 90° – 80° = 10° u f v u f v 35. (d) f   R  40 cm c c 3  10 8
2 6. (a)     1.5
In  ABD; A = 60°, B = ( + 2) v  4  10 14  5  10 7
u u v f f 36. (b) f  15 cm, m  2 (Positive because image is virtual)
= (80 + 2  10) = 100° and D = (90° – )   1   so m  . 7. (c) To see the container half-filled from top, water should be filled
v f u f u f u v
 A + B + D =180°  60° + 100° + (90° – ) = 180°   m    v  2u . By using mirror formula up to height x so that bottom of the container should appear
18. (b) To make the light diverging as much as possible. u to be raised upto height (21–x).
= 70°
v 1 1 1 As shown in figure apparent depth h'  (21  x )
19. (a) Let distance  u. Now  16 and v  u  120    u  7 .5 cm
Spherical Mirror u  15 (2u) u
Real depth h  x
v u 120  u 37. (d) u  30 cm, f  30 cm, by using mirror formula
1. (a) m
1
 v    16  15u  120  u  8 cm . (21 – x )
n u n u 1 1 1 1 1 1
20. (a) Virtual image formed is larger in size in case of concave mirror.     
1 1 1 f v u  30 v (30) (21 – x )
By using mirror formula    u  (n  1) f 21. (a) Real, inverted and same in size because object is at the centre
f u u 21 cm x
 of curvature of the mirror. v  15 cm, behind the mirror
n R
2. (c) 22. (b) Image is virtual so m = + 3. and f   18 cm
2
3. (d) h 4 Bottomx Raised bottom
f (18)     x  12 cm
I f I 10 So from m  3  u   12 cm.
4. (c)     I  0.55 cm f u (18)  u h' 3 21  x
O ( f  u)  5  10  (100) 8. (d) In vacuum, the speed of light is independent of wave length.
R O
23. (d) f   20 cm, m  2 For real image; m  2, I Thus vacuum (or air) is a non dispersive medium in which all
f 2
5. (a) For real image m = – 2, so by using m  colours travel with the same speed.
f u f 20
By using m  , 2   u  30 cm 1 1  
 50 f u  20  u 9. (c)    2 
2  u   75 cm 30cm
15cm  2 1 1
 50  u For virtual image; m  2 38. (d) R  30 cm  f  15 cm
 20
1
I f So,  2   u  10 cm 10. (a) v ,  rarer   denser
6. (b) By using   20  u O  2.5 cm, u  10 cm 
O f u
24. (d) Convex mirror always forms, virtual, erect and smaller image. 1 1 1 1

I

(25 / 2)
 I  1 .78 cm 25. (b) When object is placed. Between focus and pole, image formed By mirror formula    v  30 cm. 11. (b)  
 (7 .5)  25  is erect, virtual and enlarged.  15 v (10) 
   (40) 26. (b, c) Convex mirror and concave lens form virtual image for all
 2  I v I 30 c 3  10 8
positions of object. Also     I  7.5 cm. 12. (d) v    1.5  10 8 m / s  1 .5  10 10 cm / s
7. (c) O u (2 .5) (10)  2
27. (c) Here focal length  f and u   f
I f I f 1 1 1 39. (d) 13. (b)   i >  r, it means light ray is going from rarer medium
8. (b)  ; where u = f + x    On putting these values in   (A) to denser medium.
O f u O x f u v I f I f
40. (a)     I   2 cm. So v( A)  v(B) and n( A)  n(B)
9. (a) Image formed by convex mirror is virtual for real object placed 1 1 1 f O f u  6  f  (4 f )
anywhere.    v  h 8
f f v 2 41. (d) Convergence (or power) is independent of medium for mirror. 14. (a)   h  6m
10. (b) Given u  ( f  x 1 ) and v  ( f  x 2 ) 28. (b) Erect and enlarged image can produced by concave mirror. h 4 /3
I f I 20 1
uv ( f  x 1 )( f  x 2 ) I f 3 f 42. (d)      I  1 mm
The focal length f       f   6 cm O f u 2 20  20 2 d1 d2  1 1 
u  v (f  x1 )  (f  x 2 ) O f u 1 f  ( 4 ) 15. (b) h    d   

43. (a) m =  3 and f = – 6 cm 1 2  1  2 
 R  2 f   12 cm
On solving, we get f 2  x 1 x 2 or f  x 1 x 2 f 6 16. (a) Normal
29. (a) Now m   3 
11. (d) The image formed by a convex mirror is always virtual. f f f u 6 u  1
12. (b) Object should be placed on focus of concave mirror. 30. (b) m  3  f   15 cm shift x   1   t
f u f  (20) 6   I I'
For real image  3   u   8 cm
31. (d) When object is kept at centre of curvature. It’s real image is 6 u
also formed at centre of curvature. and shift takes place in
x
Point image 6 direction of ray. 
32. (c) u  20 cm, f  10 cm also  
1 1 1 For virtual image 3   u   4 cm
f v u 6 u t
44. (a) Focal length of the mirror remains unchanged. 17. (c)
1 1 1 20
   v  cm ; virtual image. distance t nt
 10 v (20) 3 time   
speed c/x c
 1722 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1723

18. (c) Let   and   represents frequency and wavelength of light in BC AD BC v a 4  10 3

medium respectively. t    .... Hence t = s  2  10 11 s
va vg AD v g 2  10 8
v c/ c
so       But in ACB, BC  AC sin .....(ii) 51. (d) Ray optics is valid when size of the objects is much larger than
  /   the order of wavelength of light.
while in ACD, AD  AC sin  .....(iii)
ca tw 25 4 1
19. (d)    tw    11  11 min 6 sec va sin c 3  10 8
cw ta 3 9 9 From equations (i), (ii) and (iii)  52. (b) v    2 .25  10 8 m/s h' 4
vg sin   1 .33 66. (a)   h'  h   18  24 cm
20. (a) Optical path =  t h 3
3
In medium (1), optical path = 1d1 v g sin sin x 1 .5  2  10 67. (b) Optical path x  constant i.e. 1 x1  2 x 2
Also  
1
 a    g  53. (b) t   10 11 sec
v vg  a sin  sin  c 3  10 8  1.53  4  2  4.5  2  1.36
In medium (2), optical path =  2 d 2
w 4 / 3 8 68. (b) Velocity of light is maximum in vacuum.
 Total path = 1d1  2d 2 34. (b) 54. (b) g w   
35. (b) From figure
o
60 60 o
g 3/2 9 69. (a)   tan i  i = tan 1   tan 1 1.62  58.3
21. (b) Refractive index of liquid C is same as that of glass piece. So it
will not be visible in liquid C. 90o 55. (b) Frequency does not change with medium but wavelength and
 i  60 o ,  r  30 o 70. (d) Suppose water is poured up to the height h,
3 4 velocity decrease with the increase in refractive index.
22. (b) a  g  , a w  30o  1
2 3 so  
sin 60
 3 x 3  4  10 3 So h 1    1  h  4 cm
sin 30 56. (a) t   4  10 11 sec  
 3/2 9 c 3  10 8
 w g  a g    vg  2  10 8
a w 4/3 8 1  g vw 3/2 vw h 1 71. (c) 
1
 l   l    l  1 .2
36. (b)       57. (d)   h  v g vl 1 .5 2 .5  10 8
1  2  3  1 v w v g 4 / 3 2  10 8 h 
23. (c) 2 1 3  2 4  3     1  4 1  72. (c) Stars twinkle due to variation in R.I. of atmosphere.
2 3 4 4 14  v w  2.25  10 8 m / s
sin i
24. (a) Colour of light is determined by its frequency and as frequency 73. (d) Refraction at air-oil point oil 
does not change, colour will also not change and will remains a c 3  10 8 sin r1
green. 37. (a) m     4000 Å
  5  10 14  1.5 sin 40
25. (c) Ray optics fails if the size of the object is of the order of the  sin r1   0.443
wavelength. air 7200 1 .45
38. (b)  glass    4800 Å
n w n gl n gas n  1 .5 sin r1
26. (a) a nw  w n gl  gl n gas  gas na     a 1 Refraction at oil-water point oil water 
n a nw n gl n gas 39. (c) sin r
v1  a r r / a w   R   V so h R  hV 1 .33 0 .443 0 .443  1 .45
40. (d)    a w   or sin r   r  28.9 o
27. (b) v     1
w r r / w a 1 .45 sin r 1 .33
v 2 2 i.e. Red colour letter appears least raised.
74. (d) Objects are invisible in liquid of R.I. equal to that of object.
v1 4500 3 c sin i sin 45 o
 v2    2  3  10 8   2.25  10 8 m/s  5  10  3 58. (b)    75. (b) When light ray travels from denser to rarer, it deviates away
1 x v sin r sin 30 o
6000 41. (a) t  2  0 .25  10 10 s from the normal.
c 3  10 8
sin i 1 3  10 8 c 3  10 8
28. (d) Since a  g  2 , so g a    v  2 .12  10 8 m / s 76. (d)    = 2.
sin r 3  10 8
c v 1 .5  10 8
2 42. (d) Distance = v  t   t   10 9 2
 1.5 77. (c) Frequency remain unchanged.
 sin r  1  r  90 o 1 v1  2 v  4/3 8
= 0.2 m = 20 cm. 59. (c) v    g  w   ag 1 .5 5
c 1 / o o   v 2 1 vw  g 3/2 9 78. (c) wg     1 .25 .
29. (a)    1
(c) f  . As b  g  fb  fg a w 1 .2 4
v 1 /  o o 43. 60. (b) Time taken by light to travel distance x through a medium of
 refractive index  is a 5890
1 1 x 44. (c) Real depth = 1 m 79. (b)  g    3681 Å .
30. (c)     x  3150 Å x
 x 6 3 g 1 .6
 4 / 3 4200 Apparent depth = 1  0.1  0.9 m t  B  A   A  B   1.5
c A xB 4 2 s 1 .5  10 8  10 3
 Real depth 1 10 80. (b) t    500 sec = 8.33 min.
  r K Refractive index  =  
a g
31. (c) 1.5 v 3  10 8
0 0 Apparent depth 0 .9 9 61. (d) w  g  
a w 1 .3 81. (a) For vacuum t  n o .....(i)
C C h h
32. (c)   Cm  45. (a)   h  Real depth 120 For air t  (n  1) a .....(ii)
Cm 1 .5 h n 62. (a)     1.5
apparent depth 80 From equation (i) and (ii)
33. (b) In the case of refraction if CD is the refracted wave front and v 1
(a) Refractive index   6  10 7   
1

and v are the speed of light in the two media, then in the time 46. 63. (b) Apparent depth of bottom
2
(Temperatu re) t    o 
the wavelets from B reaches C, the wavelet from A will reach H /4 H /4 H /4 H /4   1 1 .0003  1  a 
D, such that =     
47. (c) Snell’s law in vector form is ˆi  nˆ  (rˆ  nˆ ) 1 2 3 4
 2  10 3 m = 2mm.
B 48. (a) H 1 1 1 1  c n a 
      82. (a)  m    a
c 3  10 8 4  1  2 3 4  v n m m
 49. (c) v   1.25  10 8 m / s
  C  2 .4 64. (d) For successive refraction through different media 83. (b) As no scattering of light occurs. Space appears black.
A 
50. (c) Velocity of light in the window  sin  constant. Here as  is same in the two extreme 1
  84. (b) v  ,  is smaller for air than water, glass and diamond.
media, 1  4 . 
D 3  10 8
= ms 1  2  10 8 ms 1 65. (b) The sun appears above 85. (c) In vacuum speed of light is constant and it is equal to 3  10 8

1 .5 the horizon m/sec

Horizon B

As seen from
Atmospheric the earth
A refraction

Actual position of the

sun
(Just below horizon)
 1724 Ray Optics Ray Optics 1725

vacuum 11. (b) 1  2 2  1

86. (b) medium  For total internal reflection 1   1  .....(iii)
 1 3 2
sin C 2
12. (c) Semi vertical angle  C  sin1    sin1   2 2
87. (d) In vacuum speed of light is constant and is equal to  4 1 1
 2  C  30 o 1 2 2  1
3  10 8 m / s. 13. (c) sin C sin C From equation (ii) and (iii) 
88. (d) When viewed from face (1) 1 1 So, for total (Internal reflection angle of incidence must be  2 2
14. (d)   C  sin1    30 o greater than 30°.
sin C 2 3
15. (d)
32. (c) Squaring both side and then solving we get  
6 cm 4 cm 2
1 1 2
Air 1 33. (a)     v v
16. (c) Critical angle = sin1   sin C sin 60 o 1 1 1 1
2 1   1   2   2 
3 38. (b)

Face 1 bubble Face 2
x sin  2 sin v1 sin v sin
1 1
u x x 15 cm  1    34. (c) ag   .....(i) v
   .....(i)    sin1   and  '  sin1  1  sin sin  v2 
    sin
v v 6   1   2  sin i sin
Now when viewed from face (2) Now from Snell's law    1
Since  2   1 , hence  '   sin r sin r 39. (c) From the formula sin C   sin C 2 1
15  x 15  x 12
  .....(ii) 17. (c) sin
v 4  sin r  .....(ii) u1 v 10 x / t 2
18. (c, d) For TIR i > C    2  sin C 
15  6  u2 v1 x / t1
From equation (i) and (ii)      1.5 . 1 From equation (i) and (ii)
4  sin i > sin C  sin 45   n  2  n > 1.4
n 10 t1  10 t1 
89. (b) The apparent depth of ink mark 1  1   sin C   C  sin1  
19. (c) sin r   r  sin1  2  
real depth 3 20. (d) 2 



t2  t2 
   2 cm
 3/2 g 5 / 3 1
21. (a) g 
1
  
1 1 1 40. (a) sin 45 o     2  1.41
Thus person views mark at a distance  2  2  4 cm . w
sin C  w 4 / 3 sin C 35. (a) C  sin1   and   
 
41. (c)
 1   3 4 4
90. (d) Apparent rise  d 1    12  1   = 3 cm.  sin C   C  sin1   Yellow, orange and red have higher wavelength than green, so 42. (b) Critical angle C is equal to incident angle if ray reflected
  w   4 5 5  will be less for these rays, consequently critical angle for
a
normally  C  90 o
22. (c) Total internal reflection occurs when light ray travels from these rays will be high, hence if green is just totally internally
reflected then yellow, orange and red rays will emerge out. 43. (b)
Total Internal Reflection denser medium to rarer medium.
3 h 3  12 36
c c 1 44. (d) r    .
1. (b) Due to high refractive index its critical angle is very small so 23. (b)       2 also for total internal reflection 36. (d) We know C  sin1   7 7 7
that most of the light incident on the diamond is total v c/2 
internally reflected repeatedly and diamond sparkles. 1 3 3 r
1 Given critical angle iB  i A 45. (b) Here sin i   and hence tan i  
2. (c) When incident angle is greater than critical angle, then total i  c  sin i  sin c  sin i   5 4 4
internal reflection takes place and will come back in same 
So  B   A i.e. B is rarer and A is denser. This gives r  3 m , hence diameter = 6 m
medium. 1
3. (d) Hence i  sin1   or i  30 o Hence light can be totally internally reflected when it passes
 from A to B 3h 3 7
1 1 46. (a) Radius of horizon circle    3 cm .
4. (d) a  g   sin C  Now critical angle for A to B 7 7
sin C a g  1   
24. (c) C  sin1    sin1  w   sin1  8   1 
As  for violet colour is maximum, so sin C is minimum and  w g 
 
 g


 9 C AB  sin1    sin1  A  B  Refraction at Curved Surface

hence critical angle C is minimum for voilet colour.  BA 
25. (a) w   g  cw  cg .
5. (c) The critical angle C is given by  1 1 
   sin i A  1
 (  1)   
n  3500 1 1 1  sin1  B   sin1   1. (a) By formula 
sin C  2  1    C  30 o 26. (c)   2 A   sin iB 
f  R1 R2 
n1  2 7000 2 sin C sin 30
27. (c) Ray from setting sum will be refracted at angle equal to critical 37. (b) At point A, by Snell’s law  1 1  1 1
6. (c) From figure given in question   2c  98. = (1 .5  1)    0.5  
angle. sin 45 1  40 40  20 40
1 1 28. (a) Optical fibres are used to send signals from one place to   sin r  .....(i)
7. (b)    2 sin r  2  f  40 cm
sin C sin 30 another.
29. (d) 1 v x
3  10 8
At point B, for total internal reflection sin i1  2. (a)  m and v  u  x  u 
v   1 .5  10 8 m / s 30. (d) When total internal reflection just takes place from lateral  u 1m
2 surface i  C i.e. 60 o  C
From figure, i1  90  r 1 1 1 mx
sin i sin r  1 45°   f .
D R  R D  
8. (c) 1 2 Air f v u (m  1)2
sin r  sin i sin C  sin 60 o  sin C    
 3  sin(90  r) 
1 A
sin i sin i sin i  r r 2
 sin C    (as i = r) Time taken by light to traverse some distance in a medium 2 r 2 
I2  A2  4  3
sin(90  r) cos r cos i 2
90° 3. (d) IA   2
 
I1  A1 
1 i1
 10 3  cos r  .....(ii) r 2 4
 sin C  tan i  C  sin1 (tan i) x 3  B 
t   3 .85  sec. 3
9. (a) For total internal reflection i > C c 3  10 8  I2  I1 and focal length remains unchanged.
1 4
 sin i  sin C  sin i  
1 1
 . 2 v1 1  Now cos r  1  sin2 r  1 
 sin i 31. (a)    1  2(1   2 ) 2 2
1 v 2 2 2
10. (d) For total internal reflection light must travel from denser
medium to rarer medium.
 Ray Optics 1727 1728 Ray Optics

1 1 1 P P 1 I1 v I u So O  A1 A 2 R 40
4. (c)    1  2   f  100 cm 20. (c)  and 2   O 2  I1 I2 50. (b) f f  31 cm
f f1 f2 100 100 100 O u O v 2(  1) 2(1 .65  1)
35. (b) Combined power P  P1  P2  6  2  4 D . So focal length
 A convergent lens of focal length 100 cm. 21. (c) A lens shows opposite behaviour if  medium   lens 51. (c) Focal length of effective lens
1 1
5. (a) Focal length of the combination can be calculated as 22. (a) A concave lens always forms virtual image for real objects. of combination F   m 1 2 1 2 1 f
P 4     F l
1 1 1 1 1 1 200 23. (d) F fl fm fl  2
     F cm 1 1 1
F f1 f2 F (40) (25) 3 I
36. (b)   …(i) 52. (a)
O 60 f1 f2 2f 2f
100 100 f
P    1.5 D 1 1 1 10
F  200 / 3 and    …(ii)
2f 2f
30 f1 f2 f1 f2 Principle 
1 1 1 1 1 1 80 4f
6. (d)       f2   cm 1 1 1 axis
F f1 f2 80 20 f2 3 24. (a)   (Given u  20 cm, f  10 cm, v  ? ) On solving (i) and (ii) f1 f2   600 and f1  f2  10
f v u
2f 2f
Power of second lens Hence f1  20 cm and f2  30 cm Ratio of focal length of new plano convex lenses is 1 : 1
1 1 1
    v  20 cm
P2 
100

100
 3 .75 D 10 v (20) 1 2 1 n 1  1 1  1  n  n'   1 1 
 80 / 3 37. (c) For an achromatic combination  0 53. (a)     and    
f2
1 1 1 1 1 f1 f2 f  1   R1 R 2  f '  n'   R1 R 2 
7. (b) In each case two plane-convex lens are placed close to each 25. (d)      F  30
F f1 f2 60 (20) i.e. 1 convex lens and 1 concave lens. f' n  1 n' fn' (n  1)
1 1 1     f'  
other, and   . fwater  4  fair , air lens is made up of glass. 1 2 1 1 2 1 f 1 n  n' n'n
F f1 f2 26. (a) 38. (d)       F  10 cm
F fl fm F 20 
1 1 1 1 1 100 1 I f v I (25  75)
8. (a) Power of the combination P  P1  P2  12  2  10 D 27. (b)      F cm  metre 54. (b)      2  I   3 cm
F f1 f2 20 25 9 9
39. (b) Since aperture of lens reduces so brightness will reduce but O f  1 .5 25
 Focal length of the combination their will be no effect on size of image.
55. (a) P  P1  P2 , if P1  P2  P  P  P / 2  2 D.
1 40. (d) Convex mirror and concave lens do not form real image. For
F
100 100
  10 cm  P D  9D
1/9 concave mirror v  u , so image will be enlarged, hence only R 60
P 10 convex lens can be used for the purpose. 56. (b) f   100 cm.
9. (c) Resultant focal length =  1 1 1 f (  1) (1 .6  1)
28. (a)   (Given u  ) f 1 30
 It behaves as a plane slab of glass. f v u 2 41. (a) m    u  150 cm fl a g 1 1 .5  1 1.75  0 .50
f u 4 30  u 57. (a)   =   3 .5
R 10 1 1  1  fa g  1 1 .5 0 .25
10. (c) f  30     1.33 .   
1 1 2
   42. (c) Covering a portion of lens does not effect position and size of l 1
(  1) (  1) f v  f / 2  v f f 1 .75
image.
11. (c) In case of convex lens if rays are coming from the focus, then
1 1  fl   3.5 fa  fl   3.5 R ( f = R)
the emergent rays after refraction are parallel to principal axis.  
v
and m  
f
2
1
 g a  1 R1 
1  2
    1   
2 a

43. (a)  3
12. (d) Because to form the complete image only two rays are to be v f u f /2 f  1 R2    10  Hence on immersing the lens in the liquid, it behaves as a
passed through the lens and moreover, since the total amount converging lens of focal length 3.5 R.
So virtual at the focus and of double size.
of light released by the object is not passing through the lens,  f  15 cm , so behaves as concave lens. 1 1 1 1
therefore image is faint (intensity is decreased). 1  1 1  58. (a) P  P1  P2     1D
29. (a)  (  1)  
 44. (c) Size of image = f = 0.5  (1  10 3 ) = 0.5 mm f1 f2 (0 .5) (1)
f f 10(10) 100 f  R1 R 2 
13. (b) f  1 2     f R R
f1  f2 10  (10) 10  10 Given R1   20cm, R 2   20 cm ,   1.5 59. (d) f  30   R  30 cm
Object 2(  1) 2(1 .5  1)
14. (c) Focal length of the combination 
 f  20 cm . Parallel rays converge at focus. So L=f.
1 1 1 1 1  60. (c) Total power P  P1  P2  11  6  5 D
Image
     F  14 cm 30. (c)  air   lens  water i.e., 1  lens  1.33
F f1 f2 (84 ) (12) fl ( a  g  1) P ( a  g  1)
3  Also   a 
1  1 1    1 fa (l  g  1) Pl (l  g  1)
100 100 50  (  1)   fl (a  g  1)
   5
P    D 31. (c)  2
f  R1 R2  45. (d) 
F  14 7 fa (l  g  1) 3/2  2 5 (1 .5  1)
  1    Pl  0 .625 D
(b) O  I1 I 2  4  16  8 cm 1 2 5 /4  Pl (1 .5 / 1 .6  1)
15. For biconvex lens R2   R1   (  1) 
f R
fl ( a  g  1)  5  12  5 1 1 1
f (1 .5  1)  fl  fa     30 cm 61. (b) For first case :    f v
16. (d)   w   fw  32 cm Given R    f   , so no focus at real distance. 2 2 f v 
fa ( l  g  1) fa  1 .5 
  1 R
 1 .33  f  
15
 25 cm 1 f  f2 1 1 1
32. (d) 46. (d) P  1 For second case    f  10 cm
(  1) (1 .6  1) F f1 f2 f ( f  5)  ( f  20)
17. (c) If n l  n g then the lens will be in more denser medium.
Hence its nature will change and the convex lens will behave P 
100 100
  4 D R R Alternative sol. – f 2  x1 x 2  f  10cm.
47. (c) f   2R
like a concave lens. f 25 (  1) (1 .5  1)
D2  x 2
fl ( a  g  1) f (1 .5  1) 1 1 62. (b) f (Focal length by displacement method)
18. (d)   l   fl  60 cm 33. (d) f and   . Hence f   and r  v w1 w 2 4D
fa ( l  g  1) 15  1 .5  (  1)  48. (b) For achromatic combination,  0
  1 f1 f2
4 /3  (100)2  (40)2
A1 A A1 A 2 f  21 cm
34. (c) m1  and m 2  2  m1m 2   w1 f2  w2 f1  0 4  40
fl (a  g  1) O O O2
19. (c)   fl   if l  g  1  a l a  g . 1 f 5 (15) 100 100
fa (l  g  1) 49. (a)  1    f2  9 cm P   5D
Also it can be proved that m 1 m 2  1 2 f2 3 f2 f 21
 Ray Optics 1729 1730 Ray Optics

1 1 1 1 1 1 fl (1 .6  1) 1 1 1 1 1 1 117. (a) mL  4
63. (d)       v  10 cm    fl   407.5 cm 103. (c) For lens (1)     
f v u  5 v (10) 12.5  1 .6  f v u (8 ) v (12)
  1 m A  (m 1 ) 2 so that A   A0  16  1600 cm 2
64. (d)  / f  2 / f '  f '  2 f  1 . 63   v  24 cm i.e. Image A' B' is obtained 6 cm before the
85. (c) P  P1  P2  P  2  (1)  1D, lens 2 or at the focus of lens 2. Hence final image formed by 118. (d) u  10 cm, v  20 cm
R R
65. (d) f   10   R  12 cm lens 2 will be real enlarged and it is obtained at  .
2(  1) 2(1.6  1) 100 100 1 1 1 1  1  3 20
f   100 cm       f  cm
P 1 f1 = 8 cm f v u 20  10  20 3
66. (a) f1 =6 cm
86. (c)
67. (d) P  P1  P2  2.50  3.75  1.25 D 87. (b) Nature of lens changes, if mediume  lens A 1 2 Now P 
100

100
  15 D
f 20 / 3
100 88. (a) u   25 cm, v   75 cm B
So f   80 cm
1 .25 B 1 1 1

1

1

1
 f  18.75 cm ; convex lens. 119. (c)  
F f1 f2
fl a g 1 f  75  25
68. (c)   fl  4 R A
fa l g 1 f1 f2 124 cm 1 6 cm R
89. (a) F , F will be negative if f1  f2 104. (d)
1 1 1 1
 u1=12 cm   30 cm 120. (b) f  R  2 f (  1)  2  0.2 (1.5  1) =0.2m.
f2  f1 F f1 f2 F  80  50 2 (  1)
fl ag  1 a g  1 f 1.5  1
69. (c)    l   fl  5 cm R
12
 1 12 1
10
fa lg  1 a g 2 1 .5 90. (b) f   10 cm 400 3  
1 1 2(  1) 2(1 .5  1)  F P D 121. (c) Using refraction formula
R v u
a l
1 . 25 3 4
1  1 1  2 1  2  1 in given case, medium (1) is glass and (2) is air
1 1 91. (b)  (  1)  
  
70. (b) f and   f  R1 R 2 
105. (a) By using formula
v u R 1
 1  1
g a 1 g a 1 1 1
1  1 1  1 .5 1 (1 .5  1) So    1 .5  
1 1 1 1 1   (1 .5  1)    R 2  15 cm
     v   30 cm . R v u 6 1 .5 v  6
71. (d) P       0.75 D  10   7 .5 R2  v (15)  30
F f1 f2 (0 .8 ) (0.5)
R R Negative sign shows that, image is obtained on the same side of 1  1 .5 1 1 .5 0 .5 1 1
72. (b) According to lens makers formula 92. (d) f , f   f  2 f      
2(  1) (  1) object i.e. towards left. 6 v 6 6 v 4
1  1 1  1 fl ( a  g  1)
 (  1)   
  f  (  1) f   fw  4 fa  4  30 =120 cm. 
1

1 1
 
2 1
   v = 6 cm.
f  R1 R 2  93. (c) m =  3, using m  106. (c) By using
f u fa (l  g  1) v 12 4 12 6
Since  Red   violet  fv  fr and Fv  Fr f 107. (b) 122. (d) For real image m   2
For virtual image 3  .....(i)
Always keep in mind that whenever you are asked to compare f 8 108. (a) f f 20
(greater than or less than) u, v or f you must not apply sign 109. (d) 2f 2f m   2    u = – 30 cm.
f u f u  f u  20
conventions for comparison. For real image  3  .....(ii)
73. (a) Since light transmitting area is same, there is no effect on f  16 f 123. (a) Focal length of the system (concave mirror)
intensity. Solving (i) and (ii) we get f  12 cm
R 30
f 1 f 1 1 1 f F  =10 cm
74. (c) m    u   (n  1) f 94. (a)    F   18 cm (i.e. concave lens) 2 2  1 .5
( f  u) n ( f  u) F  18 ( 9) f
  In order to have a real image of the same size of the

75. (a) P  P1  P2  2 D  4 D  2 D. 95. (c) O  I1 I 2  8  2  4 cm 110. (b) Diameter of image d   0 .5    500 = 4.36 mm object, object must be placed at centre of curvature u =
 180  (2 f).
76. (c) 100 100 100 100
96. (c) P      6D 50cm
 1 1 
1 2 1 f f1 f2 (25) (10) 1
77. (a)   . Here fm   , hence F   10 cm 124. (b)  (  1)   

F f fm 2 97. (c) f  R1 R2 
98. (a) fw  4  fa  4  12  48 cm. 
78. (b) O  I1 I 2  O  4  9  6 cm  1 1  1
99. (d) By using lens formula  = 0.5° = (1 .5  1)     f = 10 cm
d  10 10  10
79. (b) P  P1  P2  P   6  4   2 D. So focal length 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 3
       v  48 cm 1 1
111. (c) f and   .  Radius of curvature of concave mirror = 2f = 20 cm.
100  16 v (12) v 12 16 48  1 
f = + 50 cm; convex lens Virtual Real 1
2 object Image 112. (c) Since intensity  (Aperature) , so intensity of image will
2 125. (d) m  
2
R 2(  1) 2(1.5  1) decrease but no change in the size occurs.
80. (d) f P   5 D P f 1 30
2(  1) R 0.2 113. (c) In liquids converging ability (power) of convex lens decreases. m     u   90 cm
1 u f 2 u  30
81. (c) P
1
f
1
 2m
u = 12 cm 114. (d) Since f   , so voilet colour is focused nearer to the
f 0.5  1  1 1 
100. (a) P  P1  P2  dP1 P2  P  10
v  25d 126. (c)  (  1)   

lens. f  R1 R2 
fl  a  g  1  f (1 .4  1)
82. (a)   l   fl  12.8 cm  For P to be negative 25d  10 115. (a) Focal length for voilet is minimum.
fa  l  g  1  4 1 .4 1  1 1 1
1  d  0.4 m or d  40 cm v  (1 .6  1)      f  100 cm
1.6 116. (c) m  5  v  5 inch (Given u = 1 inch) f  60   100
1 1 1 1 1 f f m 1 u
83. (d)      F  18 cm 101. (a) m  m   u   f 1  1 1
F f1 f2 F (18) f u f u  m  Using sign convention u   1 inch, v   5 inch 127. (d)  (1 .5  1)     F  40 cm .
F  20  
fl (a  g  1) R 15 102. (d) Number of images = (Number of materials) 1 1 1 1 1
84. (a)  ; fa    12.5       f  1 .25 inch 128. (b) For minimum spherical and chromatic aberration distance
fa (l  g  1) 2( g  1) 2(1 .6  1) f v u  5 1 between lenses.
 Ray Optics 1731 1732 Ray Optics

d  f1  f2  0.3  0.1  0.2 m . 141. (b) For achromatic combination f1    2   0.036   3  cos
A n 1 .5
   0.75  cos 41 o  A  82 o =
1 .5318  1 .5140 0 .0178
  0.034
f2 1 0 .024 2 2 2 2 (1.5170  1) 0.5170
fl ag  1 (1 .5  1)  1 .7
129. (b)   1 1 1 12. (b)
fa lg  1 (1 .5  1 .7) and   1 .6852  1 .6434
f1 f2 90 13. (b)  depend only on nature of material. and for flint glass     0 .064
(1 .6499  1)
0 .85 solving above equations be get f1  30cm, f2  45cm 14. (a) Because achromatic combination has same  for all
 fl  fa   4.25 fa . 31. (c)
 0.2 142. (b)
wavelengths.
32. (b)
130. (c) b
1 1 15. (a)    a  2 (Cauchy's equation)
fR  fV f  fV
143. (c) f and   .  A   y  1 
131. (b)    R  1  33. (a) For dispersion without deviation 
fy fV fR d 2b A    y  1 
fl a g  1 0 .5 1.5  1 and dispersion D    D   ( 2 3 )b  3
144. (b)     l  g  1  0.2 d 
Putting value of fV and fR we get   0.0325 . fa g  1 0.2 l g  1
A (1 .602  1) 0 .602
l 3     A  122.4 '
1 D'       1 D 10 (1 .500  1) 0 .500
132. (b) P1  P2  2 D and P1  5 D, so P2   3 D 4 a g 4 1 .5 4  D       D' 
 l  g  0.8      3 D  '   2  8 8
A  m
For achromatic combination 5 a l 5 a l 5 34. (c) i =50°
sin i sin i 2
1  p 2  3 3 15 16. (b)   2 
       a l  . sin A / 2  60  (d) In minimum deviation position i  e
 2  p1  sin 
8 35.
 5  5  2 
145. (c) Longitudinal chromatic aberration 36. (a) Yellow Blue  Green
1 1 = f  0.08  20  1.6 cm .
(Primary) (Primary) (Secondary )
133. (b) f and    2  sin 30  sini  i  45 o
 1  37. (b) All colours are reflected.
9 
P  P1  P2  12  2  10 D   1 38. (a) Effectively there is no deviation or dispersion.
134. (d) Prism Theory & Dispersion of Light  w (w  g  1)  8  1
17. (d)   
1 1 a ( a  g  1)  3  4
Now F   m  10 cm . 1. (b) Neon street sign emits light of specific wavelengths.   1
P 10 2. (b) 2 
135. (b) Focal length for voilet colour is minimum 3. (b)  y  1 
A
f1 18. (a) Since A( y  1)  A ( y '  1)  0    

2 A   y'  1 
136. (d) .....(i)  
f2 3 39. (d) From figure it is clear that  e   r2  0
o 19. (d)
1 1 1 90o 60o 60
20. (b) From A  r1  r2
  .....(ii) 60 o
f1 f2 30 21. (a)
4. (c)   (  1)   R is least so  R is least. 22. (c) From ray diagram A  r1  A  45 o 60o r1
Solving equation (i) and (ii)
5. (c) A  C   for TIR at AC
f2   15 cm (Concave) A
sin i
sin 30 1   C so A  2C   
sin 60

3
6. (a) For surface AC   sin e   sin 30
f1  10 cm (Convex)  sin e sin r1 sin 45 2
A 90° C 
fl (a  g  1)  sin e  1 .5 
1
 0 .75 Also from i  e  A    60  0  45      15 o
137. (d)  30°
fa (l  g  1) 2
90° 90° 40. (b) Deviation is zero only for a particular colour, it is generally
 e = sin1 (0.75)  48 o 36  B C taken to be yellow.
fl a g  1 1 .5  1 0 .5  1 .6 e 23. (a) By the hypothesis, we know that
     8 From figure   e  30 o
30°
41. (b) 5  (  1)A  (1.5  1)A  A  10 o

fa l g  1  0 .1
1.5
1 i1  i2  A    55 o  46 o  60 o      41o
1.6  48 36   30 = 18 36 
o o o 42. (b)   (v  r )A  0.02  10  0.2
B C
Pa 5 7. (a) The black lines in solar spectrum are called Fraunhoffer lines. But  m   , so  m  41o  A  m 
 Pl   sin  
8 8 A  m 24. (a)  2   sin 45  2
o
sin
A  m 43. (a) 
138. (b) To obtain, an inverted and equal size image, object must be 8. (d) 2   , But  i  45 o 25. (b)  m  (  1)A. A  angle of prism. sin(A / 2) sin 30 o
paced at a distance of 2f from lens, i.e. 40 cm in this case. A 2
sin 26. (c)  V   R 1.65  1.61
2 44. (c)   
f = 40 cm f = 40 cm F = 20 cm
o
27. (c) Y  1 1 .63  1
sin 45 1 A
So  2   sin  A  60 o 28. (b) 45. (a) For minimum angle of deviation for a prism
sin(A / 2) 2 2
29. (a) Total deviation = 0 A  2r ,  A  60 o
 v  r
9. (d) We know that   1   2   3   4   5  (1  1) A1  ( 2  1) A 2 60  30
 mean sin
( 3  1) A 3  ( 4  1) A 4  ( 5  1) A5  0 2 sin 45 o 1 2
139. (a) Using P  P1  P2  d  P1 P2  Angular dispersion =  v   r     mean Now       2
sin
60 sin 30 o 2 1
for equivalent power to be negative 10. (d) According to Kirchhoff’s law, a substance in unexcited state will  2  A2 (1.6  1)  3 (1.53  1) 9 2
d  P1 P2  P1  P2  d  25  10 absorb these wavelength which it emits in de-excitation.
 0 .53  9  o 46. (c) In minimum deviation condition i  e, r1  r2
10 10  100 AA A A  A2  3   11.9
 d m  d  d  40cm. sin 2 sin cos  1.2  A (   1)
25 25 11. (c) By prism formula n  2  2 2 47. (b) For dispersion without deviation =
A A nv  nr A  (  1)
140. (c) Combination of lenses will act as a simple glass plate. sin sin 30. (a) The dispersive power for crown glass  
2 2 ny  1
 Ray Optics 1733 1734 Ray Optics

4 (1 .72  1) 0 .72 4  0.54 68. (c) By formula   (n  1)A  34  (n  1)A and in the second 83. (b) Because in dispersion of white light, the rays of different  60   m 
  or A F   3o colours are not parallel to each other. Also deviation takes place  sin     m  30 o
AF (1 .54  1) 0 .54 0 .72 A  2 
position    (n  1) in same direction.
2
48. (a) A( v   r )  A ( v   r )  0 o  A   5 o 84. (c) 1
103. (a) Intensity of scattered light I  , since  is least that's
34 (n  1) A 34    C (1.6333  1.6161) 4
blue

49. (c) A  r  0  r  30 o A   or     17 o 85. (a)   F  = 0.0276

 A 2 ( D  1) (1 .622  1) why sky looks blue.
From Snell’s law at surface AB (n  1)
2 104. (b) In continuos spectrum all wavelength are present.
sin i 69. (b) From figure 86. (c) For total internal reflection   C 105. (d)

sin r r
1 A 1 106. (b) Deviation is greater for lower wavelengths.
i  sin  sin C  sin 
sin i A  r1  c  r1  sin1   
 2   i  45 o
 A 3 
  1
sin 30 o  a (a  g  1)   4    a
 
1 1 2
B C 1 90° or       2    1.41 107. (b)  w
1.64  1.52 0.12  r1  75  sin1   i r1 C sin sin 45 o  w (w  g  1)  3 / 2  4
(c)     0.2   1

50.
1 .6  1 0.6 87. (c) 4 /3 
51. (c) Because band spectrum can be found in case of molecules  75  45  30 o
88. (a)   ( v   r )A  0.02  5 o  0.1 o 108. (a)   ( v   r )A  (1.66  1.64)  10 o  0.2 o
(generally gas). B C
From Snell’s law At B 89. (b)
52. (a) Solids and liquids give continuous and line spectra. Only gases ( v   R ) (1 .69  1 .65)
sin i sin i 109. (b)     0 .06
are known to give band spectra.   2   i  45 o A (y  1) A (1.54  1) ( y  1) (1 .66  1)
53. (d) sin r1 sin 30 o 90. (b)   
A (y '  1) 6 (1 .72  1)
V  R 3.72  2.84
54. (d) 70. (c) In both A and B, the refracted ray is parallel to the base of 110. (a)     0 .268
55. (a) Hydrogen is molecular, therefore it gives band spectrum but prism.  A'   4.5 o  4 o 30  Y 3 .28
not continuous spectrum. 71. (a) According to given conditions TIR must take place at both the 111. (a)
 A  m   60   m 
56. (c) surfaces AB and AC. Hence only option (a) is correct. sin  sin 
 A  m   60   30  
 
2   2 
57. (a) Dispersion take place because the refractive index of medium 72. (d) 91. (c)  3  sin   sin  o
A 60   2    2  = sin 45 =1.414
for different colour is different, for example, red light bends 73. (a) sin sin 112. (d)  
less than violet, refractive index of the material of the prism for 2 2  A 60  sin 30 o
sin i A sin   sin
red light is less than that for violet light. Equivalently, we can 74. (b) A  r  0 and   2 2
sin r 3   
say that red light travels faster than violet light in a glass  = sin 30  m    m  60 o 113. (a) Rock salt prism is used to see infrared radiations.
prism. sin 2 A 2  2 
 114. (b) For different colours  changes so deviation of different colour
58. (a) We know that   i  e  A  e    A  i sin A 92. (a) Dispersion is caused due to refraction as  depends on .
2A r is also different.
= 30 o  30 o  60 o  0 o 2 sin A cos A 93. (c) From colour triangle
  0 .02 0 .04
  2 cos A (a) By using 1  2  0   0
 Emergent ray will be perpendicular to the face. sin A 94. (c) Due to the absorption of certain wavelengths by the elements 115.
f1 f2 f1 40
Therefore it will make an angle of 90° with the face through B C in outer layers of sun.
which it emerges. 75. (a) From figure it is clear that TIR takes place at surface AC 95. (b) f1  20 cm
96. (c) 116. (d) Critical angle for the material of prism
59. (a)  m  (  1)(2r)  (1.5  1) 2r  0.5  2r  r and BC
A
v   R 1.62  1.52 1
60. (c) i.e. 45 o  C 97. (c)     0 .18 C  sin1    sin1  42 o A
61. (c)
45
o
y  1 1 .55  1  60o
 sin 45 o  sin C since angle of incidence at
62. (b) 45o 1 f 2
1 1 98. (a)  1  . surface o
AB (60 ) is i =60o
3 3    2 2 f2 3
63. (d) Given i  e  A   60  45 o 2  greater then the critical
4 4 90o
 V   R 1.62  1.42
45
angle (42o ) so total C
o

B
99. (a)     0.4
In the position of minimum deviation Hence  least  2 C B
Y  1 1 .5  1 internal reflection takes
2i  A   m or  m  2i  A  90  60  30 o place.
76. (b) 100. (c) Since the ray emerges normally, therefore e  0 . 117. (d) Line and band spectrum are also known as atomic and
64. (d) 77. (b) According to Rayleigh’s law of scattering, intensity scattered is
According to relation A    i  e , we get i  A   . molecular spectra respectively.
65. (a) Sky appears white due to scattering. In absence of atmosphere inversely proportional to the forth power of wavelength. So red
is least scattered and sun appears Red. Hence by   (  1)A , we get i  A . 118. (d) In minimum deviation i  e  30 o , so angle between
no scattering will occur.
78. (b) emergent ray and second refracting surface is
66. (b) 101. (a) The atoms in the chromosphere absorb certain wavelengths of
79. (d) light coming from the photosphere. This gives rise to 90 o  30 o  60 o
67. (c) A  r  0  r  30 absorption lines.
A 80. (a) Only red colour will be seen in spectrum. 119. (c)   (v   R )A  (1.6  1.5)  5  0.5 o
sin i sin 45
    2 A  m 60  30  A  m   60   m   1 A1
sin r sin 30 81. (b) i    45 sin  sin  120. (d) 
 
  
2 2 2 2  2 A2
102. (b)  2 
 A  60 
45° r  A  m   60   60   sin  sin  121. (a) Sunlight consists of all the wavelength with some black lines.
sin   sin   2  2 
82. (a)   2    2  3 122. (d) A  30 o ,   2 . As we know
A  60    60   m  A  r1  r2 = 0  r2  A  r2 .
B C sin sin    2  sin 30  sin    sin 45 o
2  2   2  Applying Snell’s law for the surface AC
A

i=0
r1 = 0 e
r2

B C
 Ray Optics 1735 1736 Ray Optics

1 sin r2 sin A 135. (b) As the prisms Q and R are of the same material and have 5. (b) 22. (a)
=  identical shape they combine to form a slab with parallel faces.
 sin e sin e 6. (c) Cylindrical lens are used for removing astigmatism. 23. (a)
Such a slab does not cause any deviation. 7. (b) 24. (a) For viewing far objects, concave lenses are used and for
1 sin 30 o 136. (c) Angle of prism is the angle between incident and emergent concave lens
   e  45 o 8. (a) Image formed at retina is real and inverted.
2 sin e surfaces.
9. (d) Visible region decreases, so the depth of image will not be seen. u = wants to see   60 cm ; v = can see   15 cm
  e  r2  45 o  30 o  15 sin i sin i
137. (a)   2   i  45 o 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1
A  60  10. (a) P      3D so from    f   20 cm .
A  m AA sin sin  f v u 100 25 100 f v u
sin sin 2  2 
123. (c)   2  2  sin A L(D  d ) 25. (d)
A A A 138. (d) Convex lens, glass slab, prism and glass sphere they all disperse 11. (c) If eye is kept at a distance d, then MP  , MP
sin sin sin the light. f0 fe 26. (a) In short sightedness, the focal length of eye lens decreases and
2 2 2 so the power of eye lens increases.
decreases.
A A 139. (c) For a lens fr  fv   fy 27. (d) Colour blindness is a genetic disease and still cannot be cured.
2 sin cos 12. (c) For lens u = want’s to see = 
2 2  2 cos A 28. (c) Convexity to lens changes by the pressure applied by ciliary
= fr  fv 0 .214  0 .200 14 v = can see = – 5 m
A 2   = . muscles.
sin fy 0 .205 205 1 1 1 1 1 1
2  From       f  5 m. 29. (b) f   d   100 cm   1 m
(   R ) (1 .69  1 .65) f v u f 5 
A 3 A (b)   v   0 .06
So, 3  2 cos   cos  A  60 140. 1 1
2 2 2 ( y  1) (1 .66  1) 13. (a) For improving near point, convex lens is required and for this P    1 D
convex lens f 1
124. (d) Light from lamp or electric heater gives continuos spectrum.
A 60 u   25 cm, v   75 cm 30. (c) For correcting myopia, concave lens is used and for lens.
 A  m  141. (a) In minimum deviation condition r    30 o
sin  2 2 u = wants to see   50 cm
 2  1 1 1 75
125. (b) A  60 o ,  m  30 o so   v  r 1 .67  1 .63    f  cm
 A 142. (a)    = 0.615. f  75  25 2 v = can see   25 cm
sin  y  1 1 .65  1
2 100 100 8 1 1 1 1 1 1
143. (b) In minimum deviation position refracted ray inside the prism is So power P    D From       f   50 cm
 60  30  f 75 / 2 3 f v u f  25 (50)
sin  parallel to the base of the prism.
 
2   sin 45  2 144. (b) Angle of refraction will be different, due to which red and 14. (b) In short sightedness, the focal length of eye lens decreases, so 100 100
 60  sin 30 image is formed before retina. So power P    2D
sin  green emerge from different points and will be parallel. f  50
 2  15. (d) The image of object at infinity should be formed at 100 cm
1 31. (c)
145. (a) Deviation     from the eye
1 1  f   d   60 cm
Also    C  sin1    C  45 o 1 1 1 1 32. (c)
sin C  A  m 60  38
 
f  100

100
sin sin 100 100 10
126. (a)   (  1) 2 2 P     1 .66 D
146. (a)   100 f 60 6
A 60 So the power   1D
127. (c) In minimum deviation position i1  i2 and r1  r2 . sin sin 100 33. (b) For correcting the near point, required focal length
2 2
128. (c)  net       0  d   d   0 1 50  25
sin 49 o
0 .7547 (Distance is given in cm but P  in metres) f   50 cm
   1 .5 . f (50  25)
(  = Angular dispersion =  .  y ) sin 30 o 0 .5
16. (b) For improving far point, concave lens is required and for this 100
A  60 o , i  e  45 o By i  e  A   (d) Using   i1  i2  A  55  15  i2  60  i2  100 o So power P   2D
129. (d) 147. concave lens u  , v   30 cm 50
 45  45  60      30 o 148. (b) Sodium light gives emission spectrum having two yellow lines.
1 1 1 For correcting the far point, required focal length
So    f   30 cm
130. (a) At the time of solar eclipse light received from chromosphere. 149. (c) Colour of the sky is highly scattered light (colour).
f  30  f   (defected far point)   3 m
The bright lines appear exactly at the places where dark lines 150. (a)
1 1 1 1
were there. Hence at the time of solar eclipse continuos 151. (c) for near point    u   30 cm P   D   0.33 D
spectrum is obtained.  30  15 u 3
131. (a) In the morning or evening, the sun is at the horizon and Human Eye and Lens Camera 17. (c) For myopic eye f = – (defected far point) 34. (b) Negative power is given, so defect of eye is nearsigntedness
refractive index in the atmosphere of the earth decreases with 100 1 100
height. Due to this, the light reaching the earth's atmosphere,  f   40 cm  P    2 .5 D Also defected far point   f  
  40 cm
1. (c) Man is suffering from hypermetropia. The hole works like a  40 p (2 .5)
bends unequally, and the image of the sun get's distorted and it
convex lens.
appears elliptical and larger. 18. (c) For lens u = want’s to see   60 cm 35. (a) In myopia, eye ball may be elongated so, light rays focussed
2. (a) before the retina.
132. (c) In Rainbow formation dispersion and TIR both takes place. v = can see   10 cm
133. (a) 3. (b) In myopia, u  , v  d  distance of far point 36. (c)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
 A  m  1 1 1
By   , we get f   d        f   12 cm 37. (d) P      0.5 D
sin   f v u f v u f  10 (60) f  (defected far point) 2
134. (c) Given  m  A, as    2  19. (b) Focal length = – (Detected far point)
 A Since f is negative, hence the lens used is concave. 38. (a) Resolving limit of eye is one minute (1').
sin   4. (d) Hypermetropia is removed by convex lens.
20. (c) In this case, for seeing distant objects the far point is 40 cm. 39. (d) Because for healthy eye image is always formed at retina.
2 Hence the required focal length is
Convex lens 40. (a) The defect is myopia (nearsightness)
 AA f   d (distance of far point) = – 40 cm As we know for myopic person f = – (defected far point)
sin  Retina
   2   2 cos A  A  2 cos 1    100 100 1 1
 A Power P  cm    2 .5 D  Defected far point = – f = –   0.5 m
sin 
2 2 I O f  40 P (  2)
Near
2 point 21. (b) = 50 cm
 Ray Optics 1737 1738 Ray Optics

100 58. (d) This is the defect of hypermetropia. 30 25  25 

(b) Power of convex lens P1   2.5 D  m      200 25
41.  100  10   1    fe  cm
fe 
40 59. (a) For large objects, large image is formed on retina. 1.25 3
 9
100 60. (d) v  15cm, u   300cm, 1 1 1
Power of concave lens P2   4 D 10. (b) For objective lens   27. (c) A simple microscope is just a convex lens with object lying
25 1 1 1 fo v o u o between optical centre and focus of the lens.
From lens formula  
Now P  P1  P2  2.5 D  4 D   1.5 D f v u 28. (d) In general, the simple microscope is used with image at D,
1 1 1
    v o  36 cm hence
42. (c) 1 1 1 19  300 (4 ) v o (4 .5)
    f   15.8 cm D 25
43. (d) f  15  300 300 19 m 1 1 6
vo  D  36  24  f 5
 m D   1    1    32
u o  fe  4.5 
o
 1  100 100  19 8 
44. (a) As limit of resolution of eye is   , the pillars will be seen and power P  cm  = – 6.33 D. 29. (d)
 60  f 300 1
v D (b) Resolving power of microscope 
11. (a) For a microscope  m   o  and L  v o  u e 30.
 1 
o
61. (d) Time of exposure 
1 uo ue 
distinctly if     (Aperture) 2
31. (a) Cross wire arrangement is used to make measurements.
 60  For a given microscope, with increase in L, u will increase and
u o fo f D
e

62. (a) Light gathering power  Area of lens aperture or d hence magnifying power (m) will decrease.
(d) L  v o  u e   e
d  1  
2

d 32.
i.e.,    2 12. (b) In compound microscope objective forms real image while eye (u o  fo ) fe  D
x  60  180 t 2  5 .6 
63. (b) Time of exposure  (f . number ) 2    4 piece forms virtual image.
t1  2.8  2  1.5 6 .25  25
x  D L   11 cm
d  13. (b) m  1  (2  1.5) (6.25  25)
60  180 1 1 f
x t 2  4 t1  4   sec = 0.02 sec. LD 10  25
3 .14  11  10 3
200 50 Smaller the focal length, higher the magnifying power. 33. (d) m~ m   500 .
d   d  3.2 m fo fe 0 .5  1
60  180
64. (d) 14. (a) In electron microscope, electron beam (  1 Å) is used so it’s
65. (a) R.P. is approx. 5000 times more than that of ordinary 34. (c) Intermediate image means the image formed by objective,
45. (b) which is real, inverted and enlarged.
46. (b) microscope (  5000 Å) .
Microscope and Telescope 35. (d) m 
1
47. (d) 15. (c) If nothing is said then it is considered that final image is
fo fe
(d) f = – (defected far point) = – 20 cm (L  f  f ) .D ~ LD
48. formed at infinite and m    o e
(L   fo  fe ).D fo fe f0 fe 1
49. (b) Power of the lens given positive so defect is hypermetropia. 1. (c) By using m   36. (b) R.P.  ; Blue  Red so (R.P.)Blue  (R.P.)Red
fo fe 
50. (b) Far point of the eye = focal length of the lens 20  25
 400   fe  2 .5 cm. D
100 100 (L   1  5)  25 0 .5  fe m 1 6 1
25
 f  5 cm  0 .05 m
   151 cm  45   L   15 cm . 37. (a)
f f
P 0.66 15
D 25
51. (c) A bifocal lens consist of both convex or concave lenses with 1 16. (d) m max 1 1  11 . 38. (a) Resolving limit
2. (b) For a compound microscope m  f 2.5
lower part is convex. fo fe x1  0 .1 6000
17. (a) x   1    x 2  0.08 mm
52. (a) For lens u = wants to see = – 30 cm x 2 2 x2 4800
3. (b) For a compound microscope fobjective  feye piece D
and v = can see = – 10 cm 18. (b) m  1   1  DP (m increases with P) 39. (b) m  m o  m e  100  5  m e  m e  20
4. (b) In microscope final image formed is enlarged which in turn f
1 1 1 1 1
      f   15 cm increases the visual angle. 19. (b) 1
f v u  10 (30) 40. (d) m  P
5. (b) 20. (b) Like Gallilean telescope. f
53. (a) Focal length = – (far point) 6. (d) Magnification of a compound microscope is given by
(a)  m  
1 1 (R.P.)1  5
54. (c) For lens u = wants to see = – 12 cm v D
21.
fo fe 41. (d) R.P.    2 
v = can see = – 3 m m o   | m |  mo  me .  (R.P.) 2 1 4
uo ue 22. (d) A microscope consists of lens of small focal lengths. A telescope
1 1 1 1 1 1 42. (b) Resolving limit (minimum separation)  
P    P   D 1 consists of objective lens of large focal length.
f v u  3 (12) 4 7. (c) Magnifying power of a microscope m  (c) m  m o  m e  25  6  150 PA 2000
f 23.    PA  PB
PB 3000
55. (d) I1 D12 t1  I 2 D22 t 2 Since fviolet  fred ;  m violet  m red
24. (a) When final image is formed at infinity,
length of the tube  v o  fe 43. (d) Similar to Q.No. 34
L L  v o  fe  14  v o  5  v o  9 cm 44. (a) For achromatic telescope objective lens, convergent of crown
Here D is constant and I  8. (a)
r2  15  v o  3  v o  12 cm and divergent of flint is the best combination because
Magnifying power of microscope for relaxed eye
L1 L2 60 120 1 1 1  crown   flint
So  t1   t2   10   t  20 sec vo D 9 25 9 For objective lens  
r12 r22 (2) 2
(4 ) 2 m . or 25  . or u o   1 .8 cm fo v o u o 45. (c)
u o fe uo 5 5
fo 1
100 v D 1 1 1 46. (b) Magnifying power of telescope is , so as increases,
56. (a) f   40 cm and P    2.5 D (b) m   o      u o   2.4 cm fe fe
 40
9.
u o fe (2) (12) u o
magnifying power increases.
100 2  sin
57. (a) Focal length of the lens f  cm 1 1 1 25. (d) R.P. of microscope  f
3 From    47. (b) Since m  o
fo v o u o fe
1 1 1  D
By lens formula   1 1 1 26. (c) m  m o  m e  m  m o  1   Anglesubtended by the image
f v u     v o  30 cm  fe  Also m 
(1 .2) v o (1 .25) Anglesubtended by the object
1 1 1
    v  100 cm   1 m
 100 / 3 v  25
 Ray Optics 1739 1740 Ray Optics

fo  f   60  2 67. (a) fo  fe  9 cm and fe  fo  9  15  9  6 cm This gives fo  40 cm D 25 25 ~

    o   24 o 107. (c) m = 1   10  1   fe  – 25 mm
fe  fe 5 fe fe 9
f 15 90. (c) In case of a telescope if object and final image are at infinity
m  o   2.5
d 0.1 fe 6 f D 25
48. (d) Resolving power   then m  o 108. (a) or
1 .22  1 .22  6000  10 10 fe F F
f
68. (c) fo  fe  80 and o  19  f = 76 and f = 4 cm. (b) Three lenses are  objective, eye piece and erecting lens. L  v 0  ue and v 0  f0 , u e ~ fe
 1.36  10 5 radian fe
o e
91. 109. (c)
49. (b) Because size of the aperture decreases. 92. (d) Length of the telescope when final image is formed at least 110. (c) Magnification will be done by compound microscope only when
69. (a)
50. (d) Resolving power  aperture. distance of distinct vision is fo  fe
D
51. (c) Telescope is used to see the distant objects. More magnifying 70. (b) R . P.  fe D 5  25 325
power means more nearer image.  L  fo  u e  fo   50   cm 1 .22 
fe  D 5  25 6 111. (d) Angular resolution d  
52. (a) When the final image is at the least distance of distinct vision, a
fo  f 
then 71. (c) m  1  e   f  100 1 .22  5000  10  10 10
fe  D 93. (c)  o      25 o   6.1  10 6 rad .
f  f  200  5  200  6  fe 0 .5 o 2
m   o 1  e   1     48 10  10  2
fe  D 5  25  55 72. (b) Resolving power  Aperture 94. (d) a
When the final image is at infinity, then 73. (a) If final image is formed at infinity, then the distance between 112. (a) Resolving power 
AB A B  2  1.4  10 9 1 .22 
f 200
the two lenses of telescope is equal to length of tube 95. (c)     A B    2 .8 cm
m o    40  fo  fe  0.3  0.05  0.35 m 10 11 2 10 11 fo Pe 20
fe 5 113. (d) M    40 .
53. (a) In terrestrial telescope erecting lens absorbs a part of light, so 1 .22  180 2m fe Po 0 .5
74. (a) Limit of resolution   (in degree) A
less constant image. But binocular lens gives the proper three a  114. (a) Radio, waves can pass through dust, clouds, fog, etc, in a radio,
dimensional image. B  telescope. It can detect very faint radio signal due to enormous
o F
f  1 .22  (6000  10 10 ) 180  size of its reflector. So it can be used at night and even in
54. (a) By formula m  o      0 .03 sec  B
fe  5   Image
cloudy weather.
A 115. (a) Resolving limit
55. (b) In telescope fo  fe as compared to microscope. 75. (b) Final image formed by astronomical telescope is inverted not 1011 m
1.22  1 .22  4538  10 10
56. (a) Because magnification in this case becomes reciprocal of initial erect. fo  f  90  6  d    5.54  10 7 rad .
magnification. 76. (d) 96. (c) m 1  e   m  1    m  18 a 1
fe  D 6  30 
f 80 77. (c) I v0 f
57. (d) m  o   20  fe  4 cm d 116. (a) Magnification of objective lens m    0
fe fe 78. (b) For normal vision (relaxed eye), the image is formed at infinity. 97. (d) Resolving power of telescope  O u0 u0
Hence the magnifying power of Gallilean telescope 1 .22 
Hence length of terrestrial telescope I 200  10 2
 fo  fe  4 f  80  4  4  20  164 cm
f 200 98. (a) For largest magnification focal length of eye lens should be    I = 5  10 m = 5 cm.
–2

 o   100 . 50 2  10 3
fe 2 least.
f vo  D  D
58. (d) In this case  m   o  5 .... (i) fo fo  f  150  6  (b) m  1    m o 1  
100 (b) m  1  e   1    30 . 117. 
fe fe   fe 
m    50. 99.
79. (a) fe  D 6  25  uo  
fe 2
and length of telescope  fo  fe  36 .... (ii)
100. (d) To make telescope of higher magnifying power, fo should be  25 
Solving (i) and (ii), we get f = 6 cm, fo  30 cm.
80. (c)  30  m o 1    m0  6  mo  5 .
e

81. (b) Magnifying power of astronomical telescope large and fe should be least.  5 
fo 180
59. (c) m   30 fo  f  200  5  101. (c) fo  50 cm, fe  5 cm, D  25 cm and u o  200 cm.
118. (a)
fe 6 m 1  e    1     48 . fo 100
fe  D 5  25  Separation between the objective and the eye lens is 119. (a) m   50  fe  2 cm
60. (c) Same as Q. No. 58. fe fe
1 1 (b) m 
1 u o fo f D 200  50 5  25
61. (c) fo   0 .8 m and fe    0.05 m 82. L  e    71 cm Normal distance fo  fe  100  2  98 cm.
1 .25  20 fe (u o  fo ) ( fe  D) (200  50) (5  25)
 | L | | fo | | fe |  0.8  0.05  0.75 m  75 cm 1 1 1
83. (b) f0  fe for telescope. d 1.22 120. (a) For objective lens  
102. (b) Resolving power    2  10 6 fo vo uo
f 0.8 f 1.22  1.22  5000  10 10
and | m  |  o   16 84. (a) m 0 . 1 1 1 1 1 1
fe 0 .05 fe 103. (a)        vo  20cm
62. (a) For greater aperture of lens, light passing through lens is more vo fo uo 4  5 20
fo  f  100  5  f 100
and so intensity of image increases.
(b)  m   1  e   1    24 104. (b) By using m  o  fe   2 cm 
vo D 20  20 
fe 
85. fe 50
63. (b) D 5  25  Now M  1    1    12 .
uo  fe  5  10 
64. (a) Same as Q. No. 58. Also L  fo  fe  100  2  98 cm 
86. (a, b, c, d)
fo 60
65. (b) m   6. fo fo f
fe 10 87. (a) m   20 and L  fo  fe  105  fo  100 cm 105. (b) m   10  o  fo  200 cm Photometry
fe fe 20
f
66. (a) fo  fe  54 and o  m  8  fo  8 fe (a) Total length L  fo  fe and both lenses are convex. 1 .22 
fe
88.
106. (c) Minimum angular separation  
1
 1. (d) Luminous flux  4 L  4  3.14  42  528 Lumen
R.P. d
54 f Luminous flux 528
 8 fe  fe  54  fe  6 89. (b) L  fo  fe  44 and  m   o  10 Power of lamp    264 W
fe 1 .22  5000  10 10
9   0 .3  10 6 rad Luminous efficiency 2
2
 fo  8 fe  8  6  48
 Ray Optics 1741 1742 Ray Optics

L cos  Normal Now   4 L  4  3.14  100 = 1256 lumen. r22  0 .40  L L

I IA  and I B  cos 
 t2  .t1    2  5 = 12.8 sec.
r 2 
2. (b) 31. (d)
r2 60o 12. (c) Illuminance at A, r12  0 .25  (2r) 2 2
S
Lamp
Ir 2
L
 L 2m IA   1
3/2 L r L
cos  Screen h2 1    .  Tunnel
I centre (r 2  h 2 )3 / 2 5
3/2
2r 2 r 2 2 2 r2 

 4
5  10 4  10 4  2 2
Illuminance at B,
h2  r 2 20. (b)    B
O
  40 Candela h I edge h3 13 4
cos 60 L IA 2 2 1
IB  cos    
L dI 2dr (h  r )
2 2 2 L L1 L2 IB 4 2
3. (d) I   (  L = constant) A r B 21. (c) I   (I is same) A
r2 I r r2 r12 r22
Lh L
 32. (a) I  L  1.57  10 5  (1.5  1011 )2  3.53  10 27 Cd
dI 2  dr (r 2  h 2 )3 / 2 L1 r2  1 
2 r2
  100    100  2  1  2%   12     1 : 100 .
I r L2
IA  r2 
3/2
 82 
3/2 r2  10  33. (d)   4L  4  3.14  3.53  10 27  4.43  10 28 lumen.
4. (c) For equal fogging I 2  t 2  I1  t1    1  2   1  2   23 / 2  2 2 : 1
I B  h   8  Io 3
L2 L1 16 20 22. (c) I  Io cos   Io cos 60 o  34. (d)    0.685  1.37  10 3 lumen
  t2   t1   t2   10 L 2 1.5  10  3
r22 r12 4 1 13. (c) I 2
r 23. (a) 3000
 t2  50 sec . 35. (a)  surface   500 lumen.
14. (c) Efficiency of light source 24. (b)   4L  200  lumen. 6
5. (d) The illuminance at B  36. (c) Rotation of area about incident light doesn’t change the
 ..... (i)  200  2
L A Lamp p so I    = 200 lux. inclination of the light ray on the area.
IB  .......(i) 100 A 100  r 2
(0 .1) 2
12   Lh
5m and L  ..... (ii) 37. (c) I
and illuminance at point C 25. (b,c) According to the problem
1m 4 r3

L cos  L 1 From equation (i) and (ii) IA IB A P B 38. (d) By the symmetry of the rays and location of the points.
IC    4
( 5) 2 ( 5) 2 5 B C 4L 4  35 x2 (1 .2  x ) 2 (1.2–x)
2m
p   88 W .
x 39. (d) If  is the luminous efficiency of the bulb then.
L
 5 1 4
 IC  ...... (ii)   1.2 m luminous flux by 120 watt at 555 nm    120
5 5 15. (a) Case I x2 (1 .2  x ) 2
Let bulb of P watt at 600 nm produces the same luminous flux
100 100 cd as by 120 watt at 555 nm then
I B  5 5 I0 IA   25 cd 1 2
From equation (i) and (ii)
22    x  0.4 m and 1.2  x  0.8 m .
 x 1.2  x 120
1 2 .5 m   120  P  0.6  P   200 watt.
I 100 2m
6. (b) so, and I B  cos  L
L r2
0 .6
r2 (2 .5) 2
26. (c) I  2  1  12
L 8 Cd 32 Cd L
Illuminance on slide (Length of image on screen)2 A B r 2 r2 P
40. (c) Illuminance produce by the sun 
 100 2 200 1.5m
   x (120–x) (1 .5  10 11 )2
Illuminance on screen (Length of object on slide)2 2 .5 2 2 .5 (2 .5) 3 8 32
or 
x2 (120  x ) 2 10000
Illuminance produce by the bulb 
2 120 cm
 3 .5 m  Case II,
    10 4 : 1 (0 .3)2
 35 mm  I' B  X IB 
25 25 cd Solving it we get x  40 cm .
(3 .25)3 / 2 L 10000
7. (a) The illuminance at A is ' I center (r 2  h 2 ) 3 / 2 According to problem 
I' (2 .5)3 3.25 27. (d)  (1 .5  10 11 )2 (0 .3)2
L L 3 3L 25 1m
I edge
IA   cos 1    so B   h3
( 13 )2 13 13 (13)
3/2 IB 200 (3 .25)3 / 2 2 .25  10 22  10 4
L  25  10 26 Cd
The illuminance at B is  X 1/ 3
A B (r 2  h 2 ) 3 / 2 9  10 2
8   2h  (r 2  h 2 )1 / 2
L h3
IB   cos  2 1 I2 r2 60 2 1 L L L L
2
17 m 16. (a) I   12   41. (c) I1   and I2  2 
( 17 ) 1
r2 I1 r2 180 2 9 r r12 16 r2 9
13 m
 4 h 2  r 2  h 2  3h 2  r 2  h 
3m  3
L 3 3L 17. (b) % increase in illuminance
  
2

3/2
17 17 (17) B 1 L 100
2 2m
I 28. (b) I  =4 Lux. I 2  I1  16 
18. (b)
r2 52   100    1   100  78 %
I A  17 
3/2
2m A r2 I  9 
  
I B  13  19. (c) To develop a print a fix amount of energy is required. Total L L L
light energy incident on photo print 29. (d) I1   and I 2 
8. (b) r12 1600 2500 Critical Thinking Questions
L L1 L2
  I At  At  A1 t1  A2 t 2  % decease in illuminance
9. (c) Luminous intensity L  1     4 . r2 r12 r22 1. (d) According to the following ray diagram HI  AB  d
4 4
I  I2  1600  900 d
10. (c)   4L  4  3.14  100 = 1256 lumen. t1 t2  1  100  1    100   100  36 and DS  CD 
  (  L1  L 2 and A1  A 2 ) 2 G
I1  2500  2500 C
L r12 r22 A D
11. (a) I 2
 L  I.r 2  22  2 2  100 30. (b) H
r
d S

I
B E
F
L J
2L
 Ray Optics 1743 1744 Ray Optics

6. (b) If end A of rod acts an object for mirror then it's image will be  1 = R. I. of medium from which light rays are coming = 1.6
A' and if
u = distance of object from curved surface = – 0.04 m
f 5f 1 1 1 R = – 0.04 m.
2d u  2f   so by using  
 AH  2 AD  GH  2CD  d 3 3 f v u
2 1 1.6 1  1.6
2f     v   0.04 m
Similarly IJ  d so GJ  GH  HI  IJ  d  d  d  3d v (0.04 ) (0.04 )
2. (b) From the following ray diagram f/3 u = 2f – (f/3)
i.e. the image will be formed at the same position of cross.
l2 3m A
d Case (ii) When curved face is in contact with paper
B F
A' C
0.2m 30 30
o o

v
A 1 1 1 5 0.04 m
0 .2l 2 3     v f
d  0 .2 tan 30     30  f v 5f 2
3 d 0 .2 / 3
3 Real depth (h)
Therefore maximum number of reflections are 30. 
3. (b) The angle subtended by the image of the sun at the mirror 5 f Apparent depth (h)
o
 Length of image  f  2f 
1  2 2 0 .04
 3 0     rad  1 .6   h  0.025 m (Below the flat face)
2 360 7. (b) From the following ray diagram it is clear that h
  (   )  (   )  2(   ) 10. (c) Let x be the apparent position of the silvered surface.
x
 
x
A  – – B
    Object Image
If x be the diameter of the image r r
100 cmof the sun, then O
Arc x 1 2  100
  .   x  0 .87 cm 8 cm 12 cm
Radius 100 2 360 360 360
I f 10 10 2 8. (a) From the following figure 12 +(6–x)
4. (a) m     
O u  f 25  10 15 3 t = 6 cm
2 According to property of plane mirror
Ai 2
m2   Ai  m 2  Ao     (3)2  4 cm 2 i x + 8 = 12 + 6 – x  x = 5 cm
Ao 3 r

t 6
5. (d) From mirror formula
1 1 1
  .....(i)
n Also       1 .2
f v u x 5
r + i = 90  i = 90 – r
0 0

Differentiating equation (i), we obtain For ray not to emerge from curved surface i > C 11. (a) Ray comes out from CD, means rays after refraction from AB
2 get, total internally reflected at AD
1 1 v  sin i > sin C  sin (90 – r) > sin C  cos r > sin C
0   2 dv  2 du  dv    du .....(ii) o

v u u  A D
1  1
v f  1  sin2 r  sin C   r1 r2
Also from equation (i)  .....(iii) n  n n1
u uf max n2

 f 
2
sin2  1 1 B C
From equation (ii) and (iii) we get dv    1  2  1  2 (1  sin2  )
 . l n2 n n
u  f  n1 sin max n 
   max  sin1  1 sin r1  …(i)
 f 
2
 n 2  1  sin2   n  2 {sin i  1} n2 sin r1
Therefore size of image is   l.  n2 
u  f 
 Least value  2 Also r1  r2  90 o  r1  90  r2  90  C
9. (b) Case (i) When flat face is in contact with paper.
 1  n 
 r1  90  sin1    r1  90  sin1  2
 n
 ...(ii)

 2 1   1 
Hence from equation (i) and (ii)
 n1  n 
0.04 m  max  sin1  sin90  sin1 2 
 n 2  n1 
2 1  2  1
  where n  n 
v u R = sin1  1 cos sin1 2 
 n 2  n1 
 2 = R. I. of medium in which light rays are going = 1
 Ray Optics 1745 1746 Ray Optics

12. (b) Since rays after passing through the glass slab just suffer lateral  C The final image will coincide the object, if light ray falls
displacement hence we have angle between the emergent rays normally on convex mirror as shown. From figure it is seen
 sin  sin C I1 I2
as . clear that separation between lens and mirror is 60 – 10 = 50
1 cm.
 sin 
 w g
i
 i w 8
 sin   sin  26 cm 4 cm
g 9
O I 30 cm
18. (b) From figure it is clear that separation between lenses
Hence for concave lens u  4 cm , f  20 cm . So by lens
13. i i.e. u   so from mirror
(b) Sun is at infinity i formula we have d  20  5  15 cm
1 1 1
1 1 1 cm1 10 cm formula    v  5 cm i.e. distance of final
1

1

1
 f  32 cm . 22. (d)   30
 60 cm  20 v 4
f  32 () F f1 f2 f3
image (I2 ) from concave lens v  5 cm by using
When water is filled in the tank upto a height of 20 cm, the v I 5 I
image formed by the mirror will act as virtual object for water     (I 2 )  2.5 cm
 + + u O 4 2
surface. Which will form it’s image at I such that
Actual height  BO 4 / 3 d 5 cm 27. (d) For achromatic combination C   F
 w i.e. 
Apperant height  a BI 1 20 cm
[(v  r )A]C  [(v  r )A]F
1 F 1 1  0 . 6 f1 3f2 f3
3 3 1 1 1   (1 .6  1)    …(i)
 BI  BO  = 12   9 cm . 19. (c) According to lens formula  (  1)   f1   20  20 100  [r A]C  [r A]F  [v A]C  [v A]F
4 4 f  R1 R2 
1  1 1  1  1.5  19  6  1.66  38.5
F O The lens is plano-convex i.e., R1  R and R2    (1 .5  1)   …(ii)
F f2  20  20  20
12 cm Resultant   [( r  1)Al]C  [( r  1)A] F
I 1  1 R
Hence  f 1  1 1 3
f R  1  (1 .6  1)   …(iii)
B
f3   20   100  [r A]C  [r A]F  ( AC  AF ) = 38.5  (19  6)  13.5 o
20 cm
Speed of light in medium of lens v  2  10 8 m / s 1 3 1 3 A  m A  m
     F  100 cm sin sin
c 3  10 8 3 F 100 20 100 2 A 2
     1.5 28. (d) By using    cot 
14. (a) v = 1 cm, R = 2 cm A 2 A
v 2  10 8 2 1  n2  1 1  sin sin
2=1 23. (d)   1    
 where n2 and n1 are the 2 2
By using A f  n1   R1 R 2 
2 1  2  1 1=1.5 A A  m
  refractive indices of the material of the lens and of the cos sin
v u R R r surroundings respectively. For a double concave lens, 2  2
C 
B A A
1 1 .5 1  1 .5 v O  1 1  sin sin
     is always negative. 2 2
1 2 u (R–y) y  
u  R1 R 2 
R  A  A  m 
 u  1.2 cm C  sin  90    sin     m  180  2 A
If r is the radius and y is the thickness of lens (at the centre),  2  2 
15. (b) The line of sight of the observer remains constant, making an the radius of curvature R of its curved surface in accordance
angle of 45° with the normal. with the figure is given by sin 30 o 1
n1 n2
n1 29. (d) At point A. 
h 1 R 2  r 2  (R  y)2  r 2  y 2  2 Ry  0 sin r 1 .44
sin  = Hence f is negative only when n2  n1 A
h 2  (2h)2 5 r 2 (6 / 2) 2
h Neglecting y 2 ; we get R    15 cm 1 1 1 1 1 1
r
45 o h 2 y 2  0 .3 24. (a, d) For a lens      .....(i) 30°
sin 45 o f v u v u f
 15 120°
sin h Hence f   30 cm B 60°  
3h 2 h  1.5  1 f v v  1 D
5 Also m   1   m     v  1 ....(ii)

1/ 2
   20. (c) In the following ray diagram ' s, ABC and CDE are f f  f
h
1/ 5 2 symmetric 60 cm
C
A On comparing equations (i) and (ii) with y  mx  c.  r  sin1 (0.72) also BAD  180o  r
sini
16. (b) For glass-water interface g  w  …(i) 1 1 In rectangle ABCD,  A +  B +  C +  D = 360°
sin r O C D It is clear that relationship between vs and m vs v is
B h v u  (180  r)  60  (180  r)    360
sin r
For water-air interface w a  …(ii) linear.
sin 90 o E
   2 [sin1 (0.72)  30 o ]
40 cm 40 cm 25. (c) The dispersion produced by a spherical surface depends on it’s
sin i sin r AB DE h (d) If  = maximum value of base angle for which light is totally
 g w  w  a    sin i So,  
5

20 cm
 h  2.5 cm
radius of curvature. Hence, a lens will not exhibit dispersion 30.
sin r sin 90 o BC CD 40 20 only if it’s two surfaces have equal radii, with one being convex reflected form hypotenuse.
w  a 1 and the other concave.
   sin i   g  21. (c) For lens u  30 cm, f  20 cm , hence by using
 g w sin i 26. (b) Convex lens will form image I1 at it’s focus which acts like a (90-)
1 1 1 1 1 1
17. (a) For TIR at AC       v  60 cm virtual object for concave lens. (90-)
B A f v u  20 v  30

 90° 

C
 Ray Optics 1747 1748 Ray Optics

d d 42. (d) From the following figures it is clear that real image (I) will be 1 1 1 x
Also resolving power   formed between C and O So by using   
(90   ) = C = minimum value of angle of incidence at D 38.6  10 7 F f1 f2 f1 f2
hypotenuse for total internal reflection C C
1 .22  6  10 7 d Object 1 1 1 x
       x  20 cm
1 1 1 1  5 38.6  10 7   30  10 (30)(10)
sin(90   )  sin C   cos      cos  
   (a) When plane mirror rotates through an angle , the reflected
1 .22  6  10 7  38.6  10 7 I 49.
d  m  56.51 m
31. (b) For total internal reflection from surface BC 5 ray rotates through an angle 2. So spot on the screen will
make 2n revolution per second.
  C  sin  sinC 37. (a) As limit of resolution

 1   
1
; and if x is the distance O O 50. (d)  cos 45  10   10 2 cms –1

 sin    A B Resolving Power(RP) fo 400

 lg    43. (b)  m   
Initially  40 Finally
  between points on the surface of moon which is at a distance r fe 10
In the ceiling mirror the original velocity will be seen.

  Liquid  from the telescope.

Angle subtented by moon on the objective of telescope
 sin   
 x
  Prism    3 .5  10 3 3.5

–1
 10  2 rad 

cms
C
r  
 1 .32  11 3 .8  10 3 3 .8

10
sin     sin  1 x r r 1 .22 r
 1 .56  13 So    i.e. x   x 
RP r RP d / 1.22  d Also  m    Angular size of final image 45°
 10 cms
2 1 2  1 (1.5  1)
–1

1.5 1 51. (d) According to the following figure distance of image I from
32. (a)      10
1.22  5500  10  (3.8  10 ) 8
3 .5
v u R  OQ (OP) R   51 m   m     40   10  2 = 0.36 rad camera  (6)  (1.5)  6.18 m
2 2
500  10  2 3.8
On putting OQ  OP, OP  5 R
L cos  Lh 180 O 1.5m
C
38. (b) I edge    0 .3   21 o
33. (d) Here
1 2 1
  (h 2  r 2 ) (h 2  r 2 )3 / 2  A
F f fm 44. (a) Full use of resolving power means whole aperture of objective
dI
For maximum extensity 0 in use. And for relaxed vision. 3m
Plano-convex lens silvered on plane side has fm   . dh
1 2 1 1 2 r
      f  60 cm Applying this condition have get h  d
F f  30 f 2 D
3m
R 39. (a) From the geometry of the figure
Plano-convex lens silvered on convex side has fm  P1
2 p 1 p 2  2a sin 60 o 52. (c) From figure it is clearI that relative velocity between object and
a
1 2 2 1 2 2 L 30° fo D 300 f15o fe it's image = 2v cos
       R  30 cm so, I P2  60°     fe  6 cm O v cos  v cos  I
F f R 10 60 R fe d fe 0.3
p 1 p 22
 
12
1 1 L L 45. (b) Wave length of the electron wave be 10  10 m,
Now using  (  1)  , we get   1.5   v v
f R (2a sin 60 o ) 2 3a 2 h h2
P2 a P3 Using   E
34. (c) When the ray passes into the rarer medium, the deviation is L 2mE  2  2m 53. (b) Image formation by a mirror (either plane or spherical) does
  and IP3  cos 30 o not depend on the medium.
    0 . This can have a maximum value of   C  for (P1 P22  a 2 )
(6.63  10 34 ) 2 The image of P will be formed at a distance h below the
2   Joule
L 3 3L (10  10 12 ) 2  2  9 .1  10 31 mirror. If d = depth of liquid in the tank.
 =  d h
  C and   . [(2a sin 60 o ) 2  a 2 ] 2 8 a2 Apparent depth of P  x1 
2 (6 .63  10 34 ) 2 
 eV
When total internal reflection occurs, the deviation is 3 3 3 3 (10  10 12 ) 2  2  9 .1  10 31  1 .6  10 19
    2 , the minimum value of  being C. The maximum  I P3  I P2  I0 d h
8 8 = 15.1 KeV. Apparent depth of the image of P  x 2 
value of     2C . 
All options are wrong. x 1 .22  
40. (c) Distance of object from mirror 46. (c)    Apparent distance between P and it's image
Rarer   d a 2h
33.25 x  x 2  x1 
= 15+  3 = 39.93 cm 1 .22  d 
Denser 4 x 
   a 54. (a) From the figure it is clear that the angle between incident ray
25 d and the emergent ray is 90 .
 3 =33.75
o

Distance of image from mirror =15 + 1 .22  5000  10 10  10 3

x 1.22  1.22 r
4  = 6.1 mm Incident ray Emergent
35. (c)  x 10  10  2 45o
45o 45o ray
1 1 1 45o
r d d For mirror,   i.e. order will be 5 mm.
v u f
1 .22  500  10 9  400  10 3
  50 m 1 .22  x x a 1  10 3  3  10 3
5  10 3 
1

1 1
  f  –18.3 cm. 47. (c)  d   = 5m r r 
 33.75 39.93 f a d 1 .22  1 .22  500  10  9
1 .22  1 .22  6000  10 10 (c) Let distance between lenses be x . As per the given condition,
36. (d) Resolving power   2 2 48.
a 5  f    24  combination behaves as a plane glass plate, having focal length
41. (c) vi    . vo      9 = 4 cm/sec. .
 f u    24  (60) 
 Ray Optics 1749 1750 Ray Optics

55. (b) From figure it is clear that object appears to be raised by R 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

60. (b) Focal length of mirror f    5 cm      .....(ii)  sin  
cm 2 .5 cm 
10 2 2 f  y  (24  x ) y f (24  x ) From equation (i) and (iii) 1     2

4  1  1
P
Hence distance between mirror and O'  5  7.5  12.5 cm I1 S1 S2
C  sin2   (12  22 )  sin  12   22
I2
5 cm
Q R 10m x (24 – x)  max  sin1 12  22
10 cm 24 cm 68. (b) Consider the figure if smallest
10 O' y
cm
20 m From equation (i) and (ii) angle of incidence  is greater than critical angle then all light
4 O
For part PQ : transverse magnification will emerge out of B
So final image will be formed at 12.5 cm behind the plane 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
mirror.        1 1
 f  x f f (24  x ) x (24  x ) f 9    sin1    sin 
56. (d) Velocity of approach of man towards the bicycle = (u – v) length of image L =    L0
B
1

 f u   
Hence velocity of approach of image towards man is 2(u – v).  x  24 x  108  0 .
2
After solving the equation
R 
57. (c) For A  5   L0 x  18 cm , 6 cm. from figure sin 
=    L0  Rd
(R+d)
(1 . 5 )t   5  (20)  3
Total number of waves = ....(i) 65. (c) Consider the refraction of the first surface i.e. refraction from A
 For part QR : longitudinal magnification R 1  d
rarer medium to denser medium    1    
Rd   R R
 Total number   optical path length   f 
2
3 4 4 3 d
      Length of image L2    L0   
 of waves   wavelength   f u  2  1 1  2 d d
      3  2  v1  9 R
2 3
     1     0.5
For B and C 2
R  u v1 R  v1 R  R max
 5  L0 L1 3
t  2t  =    L0  9  L  1 Now consider the 69. (b) In case of refraction from a curved surface, we have
nB   (1 .6)    5  (20)  2 refraction at the second
Total number of waves = 3  3  ....(ii) 2 1  2  1 1 2 (1  2)
61. (d) The two slabs will shift the image a distance surface of the lens i.e.      v =– 30 cm.
  refraction from denser v u R v (15)  10
I I1
 1  1 
Equating (i) and (ii) n B  1.3 d  2 1   t  2 1   1 .5   1 cm medium to rarer medium A C
   1.5  =2
58. (b) Since there is no parallex, it means that both images (By plane Water Air =1 =4/3
mirror and convex mirror) coinciding each other. Therefore, final image will be 1 cm above point P. 3 3 P O
1
Object
62. (a) Here optical distance between fish and the bird is 2   2  1  v   3  R 10 cm C' I
A 2
R 9R v2 2
s  y ' y B D
15 cm
30 cm 20 cm ds dy ' dy 3
Differentiating w.r.t t we get   The image will be formed at a distance of R . This is equal 20 cm
dt dt dt 2 i.e. the curved surface will form virtual image I at distance of
50 cm to the focal length of the lens. 30 cm from P. Since the image is virtual there will be no
10 cm 4 dy dy
 9 3   4 .5 m /sec refraction at the plane surface CD (as the rays are not actually
According to property of plane mirror it will form image at a 3 dt dt 66. (c)  Pr ism  (  1)A  (1.5  1)4 o  2o passing through the boundary), the distance of final image I
distance of 30 cm behind it. Hence for convex mirror u = – 50
63. (a) The real depth   ( apparent depth)   Total   Pr ism   Mirror from P will remain 30 cm.
cm, v = + 10 cm
 In first case, the real depth h1  (b  a) 70. (d) As 2  1 , the upper half of the lens will become diverging.
1 1 1
By using   
1

1

1

4  (  1)A  (180  2i)  2o  (180  2  2)  178 o
f v u f  10  50 50 Similarly in the second case, the real depth h2  (d  c) As 1  3 , the lower half of the lens will become converging
67. (b) Here the requirement is that i  c
25 h2  h1 , 2
 f cm  R  2 f  25cm. Since the difference of real depths
 sin i  sin c  sin i  …..(i)
71. (b)
Imaging
2 1
 h2  h1  (d  c  b  a) object
1 1 1 1 2 3
59. (d) For surface P,    1    v1  m Since the liquid is added in second case, h2  h1  (d  b) sin O
v1 f u 3 3 2 From Snell’s law 1  ….(ii)
(d  b) sin r
 
1 1 1 1 4 5 (d  c  b  a) Also in OBA 10cm (f–10)cm
For surface Q,    1    v2  m B
v2 f u 5 5 4 64. (a) The given condition will be satisfied only if one source (S ) f
1
r  i  90 o  r  (90  i) From the figure,
 v1  v2  0.25m placed on one side such that u < f (i.e. it lies under the focus). i
The other source (S ) is placed on the other side of the lens
2
Hence from equation (ii) Using property of plane mirror
v 3/2 1 such that u > f (i.e. it lies beyond the focus). r
Magnification of P  1   sin  1 sin(90  i) Image distance = Object distance
u 3 2 1 1 1 
O A
If S 1 is the object for lens then   sin f – 10 = 10  f  20 cm
1
 Height of P   2  1m f y x  cos i 
2 1 72. (d) If initially the objective (focal length F ) forms the image at
1 1 1
  
o

v 2 5/4 1 .....(i) 2 uo fo 32

Magnification of Q    y x f  sin  distance v then vo    6 cm
u 5 4 sin i  1  cos 2 i  1   
 ….(iii) o

uo  fo 3  2
If S 2 is the object for lens then  1 
1
 Height of Q   2  0 .5 m
4
 Ray Optics 1751 1752 Ray Optics

Now as in case of lenses in contact Dirty chimney Grease spot 2. (a) At u = f, v = 

1 1 1 1 1 1 I2
    .....   I1 At u = 0, v = 0 (i.e. object and image both lies at pole)
Fo f1 f2 f3 f1 Fo x 10 cm
Satisfying these two conditions, only option (a) is correct.
 1 1 1  sin r 1
where    .....  3. (b, c) From graph tan 30 o  
 Fo f2 f3  Clean chimney sin i 1  2
Grease spot I2
So if one of the lens is removed, the focal length of the I1  2 v1 (a) As u goes from 0 to – , v goes from + 0 to + f
1 2
x 8 cm   3    1 .73  v1  1.73 v2 9.
remaining lens system
1 v 2 10. (a) For convex lens (for real image) u  v  4 f
1 1 1 1 1
     Fo  2.5 cm I  x 
2
1 1 For u = 2f, v is also equal to 2f
Fo F0 f1 2 10 I position, 1    Also from   sin C 
I2  10  sin C Rarer  Denser Hence u + v = 4f
This lens will form the image of same object at a distance vo such f
I1 1 1
2
I1  x   sin C   . 11. (d) For concave mirror m 
u o Fo II position,     0 .64 f u
3  2 .5 I2  8  I1 1 2 3
that v o    15 cm
u o  Fo (3  2 .5) f f
 I1  0.64 I1 . Thus, % of light absorbed = 36%. 4. (c) For a lens m 
f v  1
 m     v  1 For real image m   
So to refocus the image, eye-piece must be moved by the same (u  f ) x
f  f
distance through which the image formed by the objective has L
77. (c) The illuminance on the screen without mirror is I1  Comparing this equation with y  mx  c (equation of f 1
shifted i.e. 15 – 6 = 9 cm. r2   m .
straight line) (Distance of object from focus) x
(L  fo  fe )D Screen
73. (b) By using m    Image v
fo fe Mirror Lamp 12. (a) For a prism, as the angle of incidence increases, the angle of
deviation first decreases, goes to a minimum value and then
(16  0.4  2.5)  25 8 cm
 = 327.5 1 increases.
0 .4  2 .5 C=+1 tan   slope  
f
13. (b) From Newton's formula xy  f 2 . This is the equation of a
r r r
74. (d) P Q The illuminance on the screen with mirror is  rectangular hyperbola.
B n2
 E 90° L L 10 L u 14. (a, c) At P,  = 0  A(  1)    1.
i C r2 r3 F I2  2    5. (c) At P, u = v which happened only when u = 2f
A r1  D  r (3r)2 9 r2
n1 n3 At another point Q on the graph (above P) Also  m  (  1)A  Am  A
I2 10
R S T    10 : 9 v > 2f
I1 9 v
Comparing it with y = mx + c
 = 90 – r1  = 90 – r2  = 90 – r3 Q
At B L Slope of the line = m = A
78. (b) Illuminance on the screen without mirror is I1  P
sini  n1 sinr1  sin2 i  n12 sin2 r1 .... (i) r2 2f  2  sin r
15. (b) From graph, slope  tan  
At C  10  sin i
Lamp
n1 sin(90  r1 )  n 2 sinr2  n22 sin2 r2  n12 cos 2 r1 ....(ii)
 2 sin i 1 4
At D r r Screen
2f u Also 1  2      2  1
f v 1 1 sin r  2  3
6. (d) For a lens m    v 1 tan  
n2 sin(90  r2 )  n3 sinr3  n 22 cos 2 r2  n 32 sin2 r3 ....(iii) Image f f  10 
At E Comparing it with y = mx + c
Illuminance on the screen with mirror It means that medium 2 is denser medium. So total internal
n3 sin(90  r3 )  (1) sin(90  1)  cos 2 i  n32 cos 2 r3 ....(iv) 1
Slope  m   reflection cannot occur.
L L 2L I f
Adding (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) we get 1  n 22  n12  n32 I2  2  2  2  2  2 : 1 sin r
r r r I1 (d) From graph it is clear that tan 30 o 
b 16.
1 1 1 From graph, slope of the line  sin i
75. (a) L D  v o  u e and for objective lens   h c
fo v o u o 79. (b) Apparent depth h'  1 sin r 1
air liquid 1 b c      3
Putting the values with proper sign convention. Hence    | f|  sin i 
f c b 3
dh' 1 1 dh 1 dh dh
1 1 1    x    a w x
   v o  7.5 cm B
a w a w dt a w dt
dt dt   A c 1 1
 2 .5 v o (3 .75) 7. (a) Also v   nc  n    (3)1 / 2
2   3
1 1 1 Now volume of water V  R 2h
For eye lens   8. (a) Since
1 1 1
    
1 1 1
17. (b) In concave mirror, if virtual images are formed, u can have
fe ve ue dV dh f v u v u f
  R 2  R 2 . a w x values zero and f
1 1 1 dt dt Putting the sign convention properly
    u e   4.16 cm f f
 5 (25) u e w n  1 1 1 1 1 1 At u = 0, m   1
 a wR 2 x  R 2 x   2  R 2 x      f u f
  ue  4.16 cm a  n1  (v) (u) ( f ) v u f
Comparing this equation with y = mx + c f f
Hence L D  7.5  4.16  11.67 cm At u = f, m  
Graphical Questions Slope = m = tan = – 1   = 135° or – 45° and intercept f u  f  ( f )
76. (c) The actual luminous intensity of the lamp is I1 whereas the 1
(c) As u  f , v   ; u  , v  f C 18. (a) The ray of light is refracted at the plane surface. However,
intensity is I1  in the dirty state.
1.
f since the ray is travelling from a denser to a rarer medium, for
1/v

1
C
f 135°
– 45°
1/u
 Ray Optics 1753 1754 Ray Optics

an angle of incidence (i) greater then the critical angle (c) the 10. (e) The velocity of light of different colours (all wavelengths) is 32. (d) We cannot interchange the objective and eye lens of a
ray will be totally internally reflected. 1 microscope to make a telescope. The reason is that the focal
same in vacuum and   .
For i < c; deviation  = r – i with  length of lenses in microscope are very small, of the order of
 r mm or a few cm and the difference (f – f ) is very small, while
1 sin i 11. (a) The red glass absorbs the radiations emitted by green flowers; o e

 the telescope objective have a very large focal length as

 sin r so flower appears black. Focal length of convex mirror is taken positive. compared to eye lens of microscope.
i I f f
Hence   sin1  sin i  i (a) Magnification produced by mirror m   
12. 23. (d) The colour of glowing red glass in dark will be green as red 33. (a) Image formed by convex lens
O f u x and green are complimentary colours.
This is a non-linear relation. The
x is distance from focus. 24. (d) The air bubble would behave as a diverging lens, because Source at

maximum value of  is  1   c ; where i = c and refractive index of air is less than refractive index of glass. infinity
2  1 Focus
13. (e) Apparent shift for different coloured letter is d  h  1   However, the geometrical shape of the air bubble shall
1   resemble a double convex lens.
 
sin c  R  V so  R  V 1  1 1 
i 34. (a) The focal length of a lens is given by  (  1)   

For i > c, deviation  =  – 2i i f  R1 R2 
Hence d R  d V i.e. red coloured letter raised least.
 decreases linearly with i For, goggle, R = R
14. (a) The efficiency of fluorescent tube is about 50 lumen/watt, 1 2

 =  – 2 c = 2 whereas efficiency of electric bulb is about 12 lumen/watt. Thus Glass

Air Glass
2 1

1  1 1  1
for same amount of electric energy consumed, the tube gives   (  1)   
  0 . Therefore, P  f  0
1 1 1 f
19. (d) For a lens   nearly 4 times more light than the filament bulb. 25. (a) In total internal reflection, 100% of incident light is reflected  R1 R2 
f v u
15. (c) Polar caps receives almost the same amount of radiation as the back into the same medium, and there is no loss of intensity,
35. (c) The wavelength of wave associated with electrons (de Broglie
If u =  , v = f and if u = f, v =  equatorial plane. For the polar caps angle between sun rays and while in reflection from mirrors and refraction from lenses,
waves) is less than that of visible light. We know that resolving
normal (to polar caps) tends to 90°. As per Lambert's cosine there is always some loss of intensity. Therefore images formed
20. (d) power is inversely proportional to wavelength of wave used in
law, E  cos  , therefore E is zero. For the equatorial plane, by total internal reflection are much brighter than those
microscope. Therefore the resolving power of an electron
formed by mirrors or lenses.
Assertion and Reason  = 0°, therefore E is maximum. Hence polar caps of earth are microscope is higher than that of an optical microscope.
so cold. (where E is radiation received). 26. (d) Focal length of the lens depends upon it's refractive index as
36. (a) In case of minimum deviation of a prism  i   e so
1
1. (b) 16. (b) At noon, rays of sun light fall normally on earth. Therefore  =  (  1) . Since b  r so fb  fr
f r1  r2
2. (b) The stars twinkle while the planets do not. It is due to variation 0°. According to Lambert's cosine law, E  cos  , when  =
Therefore, the focal length of a lens decreases when red light is i i
in density of atmospheric layer. As the stars are very far and 0°, cos  = cos 0° = 1 = max. Therefore, E is maximum. r r
giving light continuously to us. So, the light coming from stars replaced by blue light.
is found to change their intensity continuously. Hence they are 17. (d) When an object is placed between two plane parallel mirrors,
27. (b) After refraction at two parallel faces of a glass slab, a ray of
seen twinkling. Also stars are much bigger in size than planets then infinite number of images are formed. Images are formed 37. (b) The velocity of light in a material medium depends upon it's
light emerges in a direction parallel to the direction of
but it has nothing to deal with twinkling phenomenon. due to multiple reflections. At each reflection, a part of light colour (wavelength). If a ray of white light incident on a prism,
incidence of white light on the slab. As rays of all colours
3. (c) Owls can move freely during night, because they have large energy is absorbed. Therefore, distant images get fainter. then on emerging, the different colours are deviated through
emerge in the same direction (of incidence of white light),
number of cones on their retina which help them to see in 18. (c) In search lights, we need an intense parallel beam of light. If a hence there is no dispersion, but only lateral displacement. different angles.
night. source is placed at the focus of a concave spherical mirror, only (V   R )
28. (d) It is not necessary for a material to have same colour in Also dispersive power  
4. (c) Shining of air bubble in water is on account of total internal paraxial rays are rendered parallel. Due to large aperture of
reflected and transmitted light. A material may reflect one (Y  1)
reflection. mirror, marginal rays give a divergent beam.
colour strongly and transmit some other colour. For example, i.e.  depends upon only .
5. (c) After the removal of stimulus the image formed on retina is But in case of parabolic mirror, when source is at the focus, some lubricating oils reflect green colour and transmit red.
sustained up to 1/6 second. beam of light produced over the entire cross-section of the 38. (c) The ray of light incident on the water air interface suffers total
Therefore, in reflected light, they will appear green and in
6. (a) Because of smallest wavelength of blue colour it is scattered to mirror is a parallel beam. internal reflections, in that case the angle of incidence is
transmitted light, they will appear red.
large extent than other colours, so the sky appears blue. greater than the critical angle. Therefore, if the tube is viewed
19. (d) The size of the mirror does not affect the nature of the image 29. (d) Dispersion of light cannot occur on passing through air from suitable direction (so that the angle of incidence is
7. (e) For total internal reflection the angle of incidence should be except that a bigger mirror forms a brighter image. contained in a hollow prism. Dispersion take place because the greater than the critical angle), the rays of light incident on the
greater than the critical angle. As critical angle is approximately refractive index of medium for different colour is different.
20. (a) When the sun is close to setting, refraction will effect the top tube undergoes total internal reflection. As a result, the test
35°. Therefore, total internal reflection is not possible. So,
part of the sun differently from the bottom half. The top half Therefore when white light travels from air to air, refractive tube appears as highly polished i.e. silvery.
assertion is not true but reason is true.
will radiate its image truly, while the bottom portion will send index remains same and no dispersion occurs. 39. (a) In wide beam of light, the light rays of light which travel close
8. (c) The sun and its surroundings appears red during sunset or
an apparent image. Since the bottom portion of sun is being to the principal axis are called paraxial rays, while the rays
sunrise because of scattering of light. The amount of scattered 30. (b) The light gathering power (or brightness) of a telescope 
light is inversely proportional to the fourth power of seen through thicker, more dense atmosphere. The bottom which travel quite away from the principal axis is called
(diameter) . So by increasing the objective diameter even far off
2

image is being bent intensely and gives the impression of being marginal rays. In case of lens having large aperture, the
1 stars may produce images of optimum brightness.
wavelength of light i.e. I  4 squashed or "flattened" or elliptical shape. behaviour of the paraxial and marginal rays are markedly
 31. (c) Very large apertures gives blurred images because of different from each other. The two types of rays come to focus
1 1
9. (a) Focal length of lens immersed in water is four times the focal 21. (c)   . V is least so C is also least. Also the greatest aberrations. By reducing the aperture the clear image is at different points on the principal axis of the lens, thus the
 C
V

length of lens in air. It means obtained and thus the sensitivity of camera increases. spherical aberration occur. However in case of a lens with small
wavelength is for red colour.
fw  4 fa  4  10  40 cm Also the focussing of object at different distance is achieved by
aperture, the two types of rays come to focus quite close to
22. (e) We can produce a real image by plane or convex mirror. each other.
slightly altering the separation of the lens from the film.
40. (e)
41. (b)

I O
(Real
(Real image) image)
 Ray Optics 1755 1756 Ray Optics
42. (b)
43. (c)
a
44. (a) Resolving power  .
1 .22
45. (c) When glass
surface is made
rough then the 1. In an astronomical telescope in normal adjustment, a straight black lens. The image of the fish seen by observer will be at
light falling on it line of length L is drawn on the objective lens. The eyepiece forms a  4
is scattered in  water  
Smooth surface Rough surface real image of this line. The length of this image is l. The  3
different magnification of the telescope is
direction due to which its transparency decreases.
L L
46. (b) Diamond glitters brilliantly because light enters in diamond (a) (b) 1
suffers total internal reflection. All the light entering in it l l
comes out of diamond after number of reflections and no light 0.2m
L Ll
is absorb by it. (c) 1 (d)
l L l 0.4m
47. (c) The clouds consist of dust particles and water droplets. Their
size is very large as compared to the wavelength of the incident 2. Three lenses L , L , L are placed co-axially as shown in figure. Focal
1 2 3

light from the sun. So there is very little scattering of light. length's of lenses are given 30 cm, 10 cm and 5 cm respectively. If a
Hence the light which we receive through the clouds has all the (a) A distance of 0.2 m from the water surface
parallel beam of light falling on lens L , emerging L as a convergent
1 3

colours of light. As a result of this, we receive almost white beam such that it converges at the focus of L . Distance between L
3 1
(b) A distance of 0.6 m from the water surface
light. Therefore, the cloud are generally white. and L will be
2 (c) A distance of 0.3 m from the water surface
(a) 40 cm L1 L2 L3 (d) The same location of fish
(b) 30 cm 7. A water drop in air refractes the light ray as
(c) 20 cm
(d) 10 cm (a) (b)
3. An object is placed at a point distant x dfrom the focus of a convex
lens and its image is formed at I as shown in the figure. The
distances x, x' satisfy the relation

x  x'
(a)  f (c) (d)
2 I
(b) f  xx ' O F F' No light
x x'
(c) x  x '  2 f

(d) x  x '  2 f 8. Which of the following ray diagram show physically possible
refraction
4. The diameter of the eye-ball of a normal eye is about 2.5 cm. The
power of the eye lens varies from n=1.6
(a) 2 D to 10 D (b) 40 D to 32 D n=1.8 n=1.5
n=1.4 n=1.6
(c) 9 D to 8 D (d) 44 D to 40 D n=1.6
5. In a thin spherical fish bowl of radius 10 cm filled with water of
refractive index 4/3 there is a small fish at a distance of 4 cm from
the centre C as shown in figure. Where will the image of fish (i) (ii) (iii)
appears, if seen from E (a) (i) (b) (ii)
(a) 5.2 cm (c) (iii) (d) None of these
9. Following figure shows the multiple reflections of a light ray along a
(b) 7.2 cm
C E glass corridor where the walls are either parallel or perpendicular to
(c) 4.2 cm one another. If the angle of incidence at point P is 30°, what are the
4 cm angles of reflection of the light ray at points Q, R, S and T
(d) 3.2 cm
respectively
6. A small fish 0.4 m below the surface of a lake, is viewed through a
(a) 30°, 30°, 30°, 30°
simple converging lens of focal length 3 m. The lens is kept at 0.2 m R
above the water surface such that fish lies on the optical axis of the (b) 30°, 60°, 30°, 60° T
Q
P S
 Ray Optics 1757 1758 Ray Optics
(c) 30°, 60°, 60°, 30° images due to multiple reflection. The distance between the nth (a) 40° (b) 50° (b) 5.0  10 6 rad and 12
order image formed in the two mirrors is
(d) 60°, 60°, 60°, 60° (c) 80° (d) 100°
(a) na (b) 2na (c) 6.1  10 6 rad and 8.3  10 2
10. When the rectangular metal tank is filled to the top with an na/2 (d) n a
(c) (d) 5.0  10 6 rad and 8.3  10 2
2

unknown liquid, as observer with eyes level with the top of the tank
16. A convergent beam of light is incident on a convex mirror so as to 25. A lens when placed on a plane mirror then object needle and its
can just see the corner E; a ray that refracts towards the observer at
converge to a distance 12 cm from the pole of the mirror. An image coincide at 15 cm. The focal length of the lens is
the top surface of the liquid is shown. The refractive index of the inverted image of the same size is formed coincident with the virtual
liquid will be object. What is the focal length of the mirror (a) 15 cm
(a) 1.2 (a) 24 cm (b) 12 cm (b) 30 cm
(b) 1.4 (c) 6 cm (d) 3 cm (c) 20 cm

17. PQR is a right angled prism with other angles as 60 and 30 . o o

(d) 
(c) 1.6 3cm
Refractive index of prism is 1.5. PQ has a thin layer of liquid. Light
(d) 1.9 falls normally on the face PR. For total internal reflection, maximum
E refractive index of liquid is
11. 4cm(glass with  = 1.5) both
A concave mirror and a converging lens
have a focal length of 3 cm when in air. When they are in water (a) 1.4
 4 (b) 1.3 P Q
   , their new focal lengths are 60° 30°
 3 
(c) 1.2
(a) f = 12 cm, f = 3cm
Lens Mirror
(d) 1.6
(b) f = 3 cm, f = 12cm R
Lens Mirror

18. When a ray is refracted from one medium to another, the

(c) f = 3 cm, f = 3cm
Lens Mirror wavelength changes from 6000 Å to 4000 Å. The critical angle for
(d) f = 12 cm, f = 12cm
Lens Mirror
the interface will be
12. A ray of light strikes a plane mirror M at an angle of 45° as shown 2  2 
in the figure. After reflection, the ray passes through a prism of (a) cos 1   (b) sin1  

3  3
refractive index 1.5 whose apex angle is 4°. The total angle through
which the ray is deviated is 2  2 
(c) sin1   (d) cos 1  

(a) 90° 3  3
19. Two thin lenses, when in contact, produce a combination of power + 23. A thin rod of 5 cm length is kept along the axis of a concave mirror
(b) 91° 45°
10 D. When they are 0.25 m apart, the power reduces to + 6D. The of 10cm focal length such that its image is real and magnified and
focal lengths of the lenses (in m) are one end touches the rod. Its magnification will be
(c) 92°
(a) 0.125 and 0.5 (b) 0.125 and 0.125 (a) 1 (b) 2
4°
(d) 93° (c) 0.5 and 0.75 (d) 0.125 and 0.75 (c) 3 (d) 4
13. A slab of glass, of thickness 6 cm and refractive index 1.5, is placed 20. The plane faces of two identical plano convex lenses, each with focal 24. A telescope using light having wavelength 5000 Å and using lenses
in front of a concave mirror, the faces of the slab being length f are pressed against each other using an optical glue to form of focal 2.5 and 30 cm. If the diameter of the aperture of the
perpendicular to the principal axis of the mirror. If the radius of a usual convex lens. The distance from the optical centre at which objective is 10 cm, then the resolving limit and magnifying power of
curvature of the mirror is 40 cm and the reflected image coincides an object must be placed to obtain the image same as the size of the telescope is respectively
with the object, then the distance of the object from the mirror is object is
(a) 30 cm (b) 22 cm (a) 6.1  10 6 rad and 12
f f
(c) 42 cm (d) 28 cm (a) (b)
4 2
14. A point source of light S is placed at the bottom of a vessel
containing a liquid of refractive index 5/3. A person is viewing the (c) f (d) 2 f
source from above the surface. There is an opaque disc D of radius 1
21. A parallel beam of light emerges from the opposite surface of the (SET -29)
cm floating on the surface of the liquid. The centre of the disc lies
vertically above the source S. The liquid from the vessel is gradually sphere when a point source of light lies at the surface of the sphere.
drained out through a tap. The maximum height of the liquid for The refractive index of the sphere is 1. (a) Here we treat the line on the objective as the object and the  Magnification of telescope in normal adjustment
which the source cannot be seen at all from above is eyepiece as the lens.
f L
(a)
3
(b)
5 Hence u  ( fo  fe ) and f  fe  o 
(a) 1.50 cm 2 3 fe l
1 1 1 (c) According to the problem, combination of L1 and L 2 act a
(b) 1.64 cm Now   2.
D 5 v  ( fo  fe ) fe simple glass plate. Hence according to formula
(c) 2 (d)
5 2 d
(c) 1.33 cm  ( fo  fe ) fe 1 1 1
3 Solving we get v    
22. A ray of light makes an angle of 10 with the horizontal above it and
o fo F f1 f2 f1 f2
(d) 1.86 cm
S strikes a plane mirror which is inclined at an angle  to the v f Image size l 1 1 d 1 1 d
15. A point object is placed mid-way between two plane mirrors Magnification   e     0  
horizontal. The angle  for which the reflected ray becomes vertical u fo Object size L f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2
distance 'a' apart. The plane mirror forms an infinite number of
is
 Ray Optics 1759 1760 Ray Optics
1 1 d 20 d 1 5 1   1 f0 30
     Also     1 .2 18. (c) 12   2  1  24. (a) m   12
30 10 30  10 30  10 30  10 sin C 4 sin C 1 2 sin C fe 2 .5
 d  20 cm
11. (a) Focal length of lens will increase by four times (i.e. 12 cm) 6000 1 2 1 .22  1 .22  (5000  10 10 )
3. (d) From the figure for real image formation while focal length of mirror will not affected by medium.    C  sin1   Resolving limit  
4000 sin C 3 a 0.1
x + x' + 2f  4f  x + x'  2f.
4. (d) An eye sees distant objects with full relaxation 12. (c)  net   mirror   prism 19. (a) When lenses are in contact  6.1  10 6 rad
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 25. (a) When the object is placed at focus the rays are parallel. The
  or P    40 D P    10   ..... (i)
So  (180  2 i)  (  1)A F f1 f2 f1 f2 mirror placed normal sends them
2 .5  10  2   f f 25  10  2
back. Hence image is formed at
An eye sees an object at 25 cm with strain When they are distance d apart the object itself as illustrated in
 (180  2  45)  (1.5  1)  4  92 o
1 1 1 1 1 1 d 1 1 0 .25 figure.
So   P'     6   ..... (ii)
2.5  10  2  25  10  2 f  1 F f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2
13. (c) x   1   t
or P 
1
 40  4  44 D   1
From equation (i) and (ii) f1 f2  ..... (iii)
f 16
2 1  2  1  1  5
5. (a) By using    1  6 O C From equation (i) and (iii) f1  f2  ..... (iv)
v u R  1 .5  8
4
where 1  ,  2  1, u  6 cm, v = ? = 2 cm. x
40 cm
Also ( f1  f2 )  ( f1  f2 )  4 f1 f2
2 2 ***
3
On putting values v  5.2 cm Distance of object from mirror = 42 cm. 5 1
2
9
Hence ( f1  f2 )2     4  
h 14. (c) Suppose the maximum height of the liquid is h for which the 8 16 64
6. (d) Apparent distance of fish from lens u  0 .2  source is not visible.
 3
Hence radius of the disc  f1  f2  ..... (v)
0 .4 8
 0.2   0 .5 m
4 /3 h On solving (iv) and (v) f1  0.5 m and f2  0.125 m
r
From
1 1 1
  
1 1
 
1
v   0.6 m
2 1 20. (c) Two plano-convex lens of focal length f, when combined will
f v u (3) v ( 0 .5) h give rise to a convex lens of focal length f / 2 .
h
The image of the fish is still where the fish is 0.4 m below the 1  h  1 .33 cm The image will be of same size if object is placed at 2f i.e. at a
2
water surface. 5 distance f from optical centre.
  1 S
7. (b) A water drop in air behaves as converging lens. 3 21. (c) Considering pole at P, we have
15. (b) 2 1  2  1
 
III order II order v u R
I order M' M I order II order III order
image image image image image image 1  1
O    O P
 (2 R) ( R)
I3' I2' I1' a/2 a/2 I I2 I3
a/2 a/2 1  1
8. (a) When light ray goes from denser to rarer medium (i.e. more  3a/2 a 3a/2   2
to less ) it deviates away from the normal while if light ray 5a/2 5a/2 2R ( R)
From above figure it can be proved that separation between Vertical RR
goes from rarer to denser medium (i.e. less  more ) it bend 22. (a) From figure
towards the normal. nth order image formed in the two mirrors = 2na
    10  90
This property is satisfying by the ray diagram (i) only. 16. (c) Here object and image are at the same position so this position
 IR
must be centre of    40 o 
9. (c) curvature 10 o Horizontal
 line
 R = 12 cm
R Plane
60° 30° T R 23. (b) mirror
60° 60° 60° 30°
f  C 2f
Q 30° 2
30° S
30°
l ( 2f – l)
30° A
P 17. (b) For TIR at PQ ;   C
F
From geometry of figure   60 i.e. 60  C A' C
10. (a) Light ray is going from liquid (Denser) to air (Rarer) and angle
o
of refraction is 90 , so angle of incidence must be equal to  sin60  sinC
v for mirror and A' will be its
End A of the rod acts as an object
critical angle 3  Liquid 3 image so u = 2f – l = 20 – 5 = 15 cm
90°     Liquid    Pr ism
from figure 2  Pr ism 2 1 1 1
   
1 1 1
   v = – 30 cm .
f v u  10 v 15
4 C 5 cm 3
sin C  3cm   Liquid   1 .5   Liquid  1 .3 . Length of image (30  20)
5
2 Now m   2
Length of object 5
E
4cm